Enercalc Manual

Structural Engineering Library
Version 6
ENERCALC, INC
1983-2011 ENERCALC, INC
Structural Engineering Library

Version 6.0
by Michael D. Brooks, S.E., P.E.
A product of ENERCALC, INC.
Structural Engineering Library Version 6

All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems - without the written permission of the publisher. Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and/or registered trademarks of the respective owners. The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and the author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it. In no event shall the publisher and the author be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or indirectly by this document.
ENERCALC Engineering Software Publisher ENERCALC, INC. Managing Editor Michael D. Brook s, S.E., P.E. Post Office Box 188 Corona del Mar, CA 92625 (949) 645-0151 (800) 424-2252 Fax: (949) 645-3881 Sales: info@enercalc.com Support : support@enercalc.com Web : www.enercalc.com
Vesion 6 User's Reference March 2010 Corona del Mar, CA, USA
Table of Contents
Foreword 0
Part I Introduction
1 Welcome ................................................................................................................................... 3 2 Our History ................................................................................................................................... 4 3 Warning & Disclaimer ................................................................................................................................... 6 4 License & Copyright ................................................................................................................................... 7 5 End of ................................................................................................................................... 8 Service Policy
Part II Installation & Activation
10
1 License Types ................................................................................................................................... 12 2 Installation Overview ................................................................................................................................... 14 3 Single Computer Installation ................................................................................................................................... 16 4 Network Installation ................................................................................................................................... 17 5 Network License Manager ................................................................................................................................... 18 6 Manual Activation ................................................................................................................................... 19 7 Moving & Maintaining License Activation ................................................................................................................................... 21
Part III Software Updates Part IV Support & Maintenance
25 30
1 Web Update ................................................................................................................................... 26
1 Maintenance & Support Plan ................................................................................................................................... 31 2 Getting Assistance ................................................................................................................................... 32 3 Viewing Enhancements and Changes to the Software ................................................................................................................................... 34
Part V Getting Started
36
1 System Overview & Design Philosophy ................................................................................................................................... 37 2 Evaluation Mode ................................................................................................................................... 38 3 About Our Documentation ................................................................................................................................... 39 4 Building Codes Supported ................................................................................................................................... 40 5 Learning the Structural Engineering Library ................................................................................................................................... 41 6 Introductory Videos ................................................................................................................................... 42 7 Request for Suggestions ................................................................................................................................... 43
Part VI Program Overview
45
1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 46 2 User Information ................................................................................................................................... 48
Contents
II
3 Program Settings ................................................................................................................................... 49 4 Files & File Locations ................................................................................................................................... 56 5 Project Assistant ................................................................................................................................... 57 6 Databases ................................................................................................................................... 59 7 Screen Layout ................................................................................................................................... 63 8 Generating Reports ................................................................................................................................... 66 9 General Calculation Screen Usage ................................................................................................................................... 68
Part VII Main Menu

1 File
71
................................................................................................................................... 72
2 Settings ................................................................................................................................... 79 3 Databases ................................................................................................................................... 80

Load Combination Database .......................................................................................................................................................... 81
4 Tools ................................................................................................................................... 84 5 License ................................................................................................................................... 86 6 Help ................................................................................................................................... 87
Part VIII Project Manager
93
1 General Division ................................................................................................................................... 99

Project Information .......................................................................................................................................................... 100 Client Information .......................................................................................................................................................... 101 Building Code Information .......................................................................................................................................................... 102 Designer Notes .......................................................................................................................................................... 103 Revision List .......................................................................................................................................................... 104
2 Loads & Forces Division ................................................................................................................................... 105 3 Calculation List ................................................................................................................................... 106
Divisions .......................................................................................................................................................... 110 Adding, Deleting, Copying .......................................................................................................................................................... 114 Sorting by Division, Type & Material .......................................................................................................................................................... 116 Changing Calculation Order .......................................................................................................................................................... 120 Importing Calculations .......................................................................................................................................................... 123
4 Project Printing ................................................................................................................................... 128
Part IX Sample Session
132
1 Getting Started ................................................................................................................................... 133 2 Starting the Program ................................................................................................................................... 134 3 Project Assistant ................................................................................................................................... 135 4 Creating a Project File ................................................................................................................................... 137 5 Entering Project Information ................................................................................................................................... 139 6 Setting up your Title Block ................................................................................................................................... 141 7 Adding a Calculation ................................................................................................................................... 143 8 Viewing the Calculation Screen ................................................................................................................................... 146 9 Entering Data ................................................................................................................................... 147
II
III
Structural Engineering Library Version 6 10 Selecting Sections and Materials from Built-in Databases ................................................................................................................................... 159 11 Displaying a Sketch ................................................................................................................................... 164 12 Displaying Diagrams ................................................................................................................................... 165 13 Automatic Member Section Selection ................................................................................................................................... 167 14 Printing a Calculation ................................................................................................................................... 170 15 Saving a Calculation ................................................................................................................................... 173 16 Editing a Division Name and Adding a New Division ................................................................................................................................... 174 17 Adding Another Calculation ................................................................................................................................... 178 18 Creating a Technical Support Question ................................................................................................................................... 182 19 Closing a Project File ................................................................................................................................... 187
Part X Calculation Modules
189
1 Loads & Forces Division ................................................................................................................................... 190

ASCE Seismic Base Shear .......................................................................................................................................................... 191 ASCE Seismic Demands on Nonstructural Components .......................................................................................................................................................... 204 ASCE Seismic Wall Anchorage .......................................................................................................................................................... 205 ASCE Wind Enclosure .......................................................................................................................................................... 207 ASCE 7-10 Wind Forces, Chapter 27, Part 1 .......................................................................................................................................................... 209 ASCE 7-05 Section 6.4, MWFRS:Simplified Forces .......................................................................................................................................................... 224 IBC 2009 Alternate All-Heights Wind Method .......................................................................................................................................................... 227 ASCE Snow Loads .......................................................................................................................................................... 233 ASCE Live and Roof Live Load Reduction .......................................................................................................................................................... 238
2 Beams ................................................................................................................................... 239

Multiple Simple Beam .......................................................................................................................................................... 252 Wood Beam .......................................................................................................................................................... 263 Steel Beam .......................................................................................................................................................... 274 Concrete Beam .......................................................................................................................................................... 279 Composite Steel Beam .......................................................................................................................................................... 284 Wood Ledger .......................................................................................................................................................... 295 Masonry Lintel .......................................................................................................................................................... 302 Steel Beam with Torsional Loads .......................................................................................................................................................... 308
3 Columns ................................................................................................................................... 313

Column Slenderness .......................................................................................................................................................... 318 Wood Column .......................................................................................................................................................... 322 Steel Column .......................................................................................................................................................... 331 Concrete Column .......................................................................................................................................................... 337 Masonry Column .......................................................................................................................................................... 353
4 General Walls ................................................................................................................................... 359

Cantilevered Retaining Wall .......................................................................................................................................................... 360 Concrete Slender Wall .......................................................................................................................................................... 390 Masonry Slender Wall .......................................................................................................................................................... 404
5 Shear Walls ................................................................................................................................... 418

Concrete Shear Wall .......................................................................................................................................................... 419
6 Foundation ................................................................................................................................... 435

General Footing .......................................................................................................................................................... 435 Combined Footing .......................................................................................................................................................... 446 Wall Footing.......................................................................................................................................................... 455 Point Load on Slab .......................................................................................................................................................... 465 1983-2011 ENERCALC, INC
Contents
Pile Group
IV
.......................................................................................................................................................... 468
7 2-D ................................................................................................................................... 472 Frame Analysis

Frame Wizard .......................................................................................................................................................... 477 Joints & Joint Loads .......................................................................................................................................................... 482 Joint Data ......................................................................................................................................................... 485 Joint Loads & Results ......................................................................................................................................................... 489 Members & .......................................................................................................................................................... 492 Member Loads Member Data ......................................................................................................................................................... 494 Member Loads ......................................................................................................................................................... 503 Member Forces ......................................................................................................................................................... 509 Sections & Materials .......................................................................................................................................................... 510 Section Data ......................................................................................................................................................... 510 Material Data ......................................................................................................................................................... 512 Load Combinations .......................................................................................................................................................... 514 Results .......................................................................................................................................................... 517 Extreme Values ......................................................................................................................................................... 517 Joint Displacements & Reactions ......................................................................................................................................................... 520 Member End Forces ......................................................................................................................................................... 521 Member Details ......................................................................................................................................................... 522 Member Check Results ......................................................................................................................................................... 523 Sign Convention ......................................................................................................................................................... 525 Frame Sketch .......................................................................................................................................................... 528 Member Diagrams .......................................................................................................................................................... 529 Reports .......................................................................................................................................................... 531 Printout .......................................................................................................................................................... 532
8 Miscellaneous Calculation Modules ................................................................................................................................... 538

General Beam Analysis .......................................................................................................................................................... 539 Torsional Analysis of Rigid Diphragm .......................................................................................................................................................... 543 Pole Footing.......................................................................................................................................................... 556 Embedded in Soil General Section Property Calculator .......................................................................................................................................................... 562 Rebar Development Table .......................................................................................................................................................... 569 Steel Bolt Group Analysis .......................................................................................................................................................... 571 Steel Base Plate .......................................................................................................................................................... 574
9 External Items ................................................................................................................................... 584

EXCEL Spreadsheet .......................................................................................................................................................... 585 WORD Document .......................................................................................................................................................... 589 Adobe Acrobat PDF .......................................................................................................................................................... 593 Scanned Document .......................................................................................................................................................... 597
IV
Part
Introduction
Introduction
Last Revised: 27 April 2012
1.1
Welcome
Welcome To The Structural Engineering Library You've chosen one of the most respected Structural Engineering software packages available today. In continuous development since 1983, Version 6.0 is the culmination of years of development and refinement from suggestions of engineers worldwide. The Structural Engineering Library is developed with the practicing engineer in mind. Although large complex frames are fun projects, structural engineers spend most of their time designing and analyzing the components of structures. Because most of the buildings worldwide rely on simple beams, columns, foundations, walls, and other small items, this software system will quickly become your best friend. The Structural Engineering Library remembers the mathematics, building code provisions, and standard materials you need to perform a detailed and economical design. Because we feel that simple, repetitive engineering problems are far more common than extensive 3-D frame analysis, this software package is designed specifically for fast, interactive engineering design of building components. We've combined the typical working methods of engineers, national building code provisions, and construction material databases with the principles of structural mechanics into each "calcsheet" module. You will find that these modules operate very much like an electronic calculation pad.....simply fill in the data entries and the entire calculation will be instantly updated for your review. To add even more power and utility to the system, we've added detailed design sketches and stress diagrams, automatic design and sizing, an online help system, material databases, and elegant calculation printing to the Structural Engineering Library. The Structural Engineering Library is designed around a file of calculations called a " Project". This single file with the extension "EC6" can hold one or thousands of individual calculations. You add, edit, and delete the calculations in your Project File during the inoffice design stage. Then, when it's time for submittal to a governing agency, you can print a complete set of calculations. Because of the ever-expanding number of modules, we invite you to stay in close contact with our website at . Maintenance releases, up-to-the-minute technical advice, revised electronic documentation, and new product information will all be provided there FIRST. ENERCALC has put years of work into this package in support of the highly technical and dedicated service Structural Engineers provide to the people of the world. We continue to enhance this product weekly and are committed to developing this product well into the future. We extend our thanks for choosing ENERCALC, and look forward to using your suggestions to provide you with ever improving tools for your daily work.
www.enercalc.com
Introduction
1.2
Our History
ENERCALC Engineering Software (now ENERCALC, INC.) originated as one young engineer playing with his new T.I. programmable calculator in 1980. In 1981, a set of Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet templates was developed to automate the repetitive design of components of tilt-up and small office buildings. The software proved so productive and time saving that it was decided to market it in the newly founded microcomputer industry. The entire set of 26 spreadsheet "templates" was named the Structural Engineering Library and shipped on three 360K 5 1/4" diskettes, running on a 4.77 MHz 8086 IBM PC. Typical cost of this state of the art engineering hardware and software system was $6,000! As years went by, sales of the product increased. For engineers to purchase a technical software system based as a pre-programmed spreadsheet "template", it was a testament both to the intelligence of the users and to the easy and simple design of the spreadsheet based software package. In 1986, Lotus Development introduced a tool for programmers to link programs written in "C" to the very guts of 1-2-3. Called the "Add-In Toolkit", it offered a unique opportunity for ENERCALC software designers. A decision was made to rewrite all of the current engineering spreadsheet "templates" into the "C" language, and link these powerful programs to simple 1-2-3 "templates". The Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheets would become data entry/output screens driving powerful "C" language compiled processing programs. This solved the major problem with a spreadsheet.....lack of iteration capability that was critical to engineering tasks. Our first application of this technology was FastFrame 2-D introduced in 1987. FastFrame transformed a simple, off-the-shelf spreadsheet program into a powerful finiteelement analysis system with full graphics. Prior to founding RISA Technologies, Bruce Bates worked on a "lightning fast" 16 MHz PC to develop the FastFrame solver. That solver would later become the guts of the first version of RISA 2-D. Users were amazed that the previously complex batch processed frame analysis systems were reduced to entering a number in a spreadsheet and INSTANTLY the entire frame was recalculated. At the 1987 Lotus Developers Conference in Boston, MA, the actual software authors of Lotus 1-2-3 were stunned to see their "business tool" doing complex analysis for multi story buildings! With the decline of DOS and Lotus 1-2-3 , ENERCALC rewrote the entire "user interface" portion that provided the calculation screens and printing. Keeping the same "look and feel" to ease the change for users, our programmers wrote our own user interface program, as simple and fast as 1-2-3, complete with support for hundreds of printers. Version 4.4 for DOS was released in August of 1994, and produced a large increase in ENERCALC's user base. Version 4.4 for DOS has become known as the "Volkswagen of structural engineering software"... simple, enduring, yet designed to get you almost anywhere. The Structural Engineering Library 5.0 for Windows was introduced in 1996 as a completely new rewrite of the legacy systems of the previous 15 years. Although much of the proven "C" language engineering calculation processes were retained, the rest of the
system was redesigned and written from scratch for the modern Windows based computer systems. The days of a spreadsheet based program were now gone, and a new system designed to be as easy as 1-2-3 was introduced. In 2007 ENERCALC released Version 6 of the Structural Engineering Library. Over the course of three decades since ENERCALC began we've enjoyed a large, loyal and consistently growing base of users. This new version is a complete rewrite....the first of its kind. New solvers, graphics, reporting, user interface, and database designs prepare this new platform with the future in mind. We look forward to years of enhancements based on this new release! Sincerely, Michael D. Brooks, P.E., S.E. President & Founder ENERCALC, INC.
Introduction
1.3
Warning & Disclaimer

Although it is our intent that the information contained in this manual and associated software program is accurate and reliable, it is possible that there may be errors, both of omission and commission, that we are not aware of at any time. ENERCALC, Inc. can make no warranties, either express or implied, as to the accuracy of the material in this manual and software nor its suitability for a specific purpose or application for which it is advertised. ENERCALC, Inc., its owners, directors, and employees, can offer no guarantee and will accept no liability for damages of any kind resulting from the use of the information contained or generated by this document and the accompanying computer software. If you do not agree to be bound by these conditions and the conditions contained in the License Agreement 7 contained herein, then you may Internet deactivate the program and uninstall the software within a sixty (60) day period after the date of your order and request a full refund of the License Fee.
1.4
License & Copyright

The complete License Agreement can be viewed by using the following link:
License Agreement
Introduction
1.5
End of Service Policy

At some point in the future the current version software will undergo a major overhaul of capability increase. At this time the prior version reaches its "End of Service" time. When a version reaches its "End of Service", access to support and maintenance will cease in about 6 months (the time frame will be set by ENERCALC and is at our discretion). The software will continue to operate but technical support, updates, access to the Online Community, and other support related items will cease to be available. All software products, Structural Engineering Library included, have a practical commercial lifetime. In order to provide the highest quality products and support to our customers, each product is developed utilizing a product life cycle methodology, which includes an End-of-Service (EOS) phase. The ENERCALC product EOS policy is to support the current release plus the previous (one back) release for up to six (6) months by default. After this time, ENERCALC's product development ceases active development and support of that software release within the Maintenance and Support Plan. ENERCALC does not create or make available maintenance releases or patches for software that has reached the EOS milestone. During the EOS phase, ENERCALC will continue to investigate, troubleshoot, and characterize issues in an attempt to provide solutions and workarounds using the production releases. If a solution cannot be found using software that has reached the EOS milestone, ENERCALC will suggest that the system be upgraded to a more recent software release. Once the EOS process starts on a product release, a notice will be posted on all relevant pages stating that the product release has entered the EOS process. Note: This policy is subject to revision.
Part
II
Installation & Activation
10

General The Structural Engineering Library Version 6.0 (SEL) must be installed on each computer where it will be used. Whether your software is covered by a Flex License or a Network License the software must reside on the actual computer to be used. When using our installation program you are offered two choices: Structural Engineering Library and Network License Manager. Choose the Structural Engineering Library option to install the software on all computers where it will be used. If you have a Network License you will also be installing the Network License Manager (NLM). (ENERCALC's Network License Manager is used to control the simultaneous activation of the SEL on many computers in your office.) Before installing the NLM make sure that you need it and that you have already been given a current Product Control Code for activation.
Version 6.0 has a new license security system that activates the software.
11
For users who have a Flex License this involves a copy & paste of the Product Control Code (PCC) into the activation section of the program and then using an [Internet Activate] button to obtain activation permission from our Internet Activation server. You can install the SEL on ANY computer that you may wish to use it on, BUT before you can have it work in "Licensed" mode you must Activate it. This means you can easily move the activation of the software around between all of your computers. You can just use this Internet based activation and deactivation ability to use the software wherever you wish. For network users, the Product Control Code only activates the Network License Manager (NLM) (see below). You then install the SEL on all computers where you will use the software. When the NLM is used it is not necessary to enter the PCC on all of the workstations where the SEL is installed. When the SEL is launched on the workstations, it simply gets permission to run from the Network License Manager.
Important: Anti-Virus software and Firewalls Our Internet Activation system (and Web Update system) use the Internet with typical "http over port 80" communications. You may have to tell your anti-virus and firewall software to allow two of our programs the ability to communicate over the Internet. These program file names are EC6.exe and ec6webupdate.exe, and they are typically installed in the Program Files\ENERCALC_6 folder. If you do not perform this task then your activation request may not receive a response. There are other methods of manually activating the software if you do not have an Internet Connection. Please see the "For Our Users" page at www.enercalc.com/users.html under Manual License Activation and also the last section in this guide.
12
2.1
License Types
There are four licensing modes that the Structural Engineering Library can operate in: Licensed Mode When you have purchased a software license you will receive a Product Control Code that will allow you to activate the software. After you have entered your Product Control Code and performed an activation, the product will be completely operational. Your user registration number and licensee name will appear on all printouts and you will see a Maintenance & Support Plan expiration date on the licensing screen. Short Term License This is a limited time license that expires several months after purchase. When you have purchased a software license you will receive a Product Control Code that will allow you to activate the software. After you have entered your Product Control Code and performed an activation the product will be completely operational. Your user registration number and licensee name will appear on all printouts and you will see a Maintenance & Support Plan expiration date on the licensing screen. Academic Mode This is a special version/mode for students. Each time an Academic license is granted an expiration date is set after which time the software stops operating. In addition the printouts have a watermark stating that it is an educational version and the student's name and registration number are printed. License. Plan Check Mode This is a special version/mode for public plan review agencies. Each time a Plan Check license is granted an expiration date is set after which time the software stops operating. In addition the printouts have a watermark stating that it is a plan check version and the agency's name and registration number are printed. Plan Check License.
Click here Click here
for an application for an Academic
for an application for a
The software is also capable of operating in an unlicensed or "Evaluation" mode: Evaluation Mode If you do not activate the software it will operate in Evaluation mode. You still have complete access to all parts of the software. However, a window will pop up at random intervals to remind you that you are using the Evaluation Version and your printouts will have an "Evaluation Version, Not for Commercial Use" watermark.
13
14
2.2
Installation Overview
General For the more current installation information you need to review this document located on our website:
http://www.enercalc.com/pdf/EC_V6_Install_Info.pdf
Click here for a video
The Structural Engineering Library Version 6.0 (SEL) must be installed on each computer where it will be used. But it must be activated to be used in "Licensed" mode. You have two main options for how you obtain that activation. The preferred option is to use our Internet Activation system. The other common option is to use the Network License Manager. The activation method is chosen at the time the software is ordered, and the Product Control Code that you are issued is coordinated with that activation method. We'll cover activation shortly, but at this point it is important to understand that your chosen activation method has some influence over exactly what steps you must take during the installation process. When using our installation program you have two choices: Structural Engineering Library and Network License Manager. You will always install the Structural Engineering Library on all computers where it will be used. You will only install the Network License Manager if you have chosen the option of a Network License. Flex Licenses never require the installation of the Network License Manager. For users who have chosen the Flex License option, Version 6.0 has a new security system that Activates the software.This involves entering a Product Control Code (PCC) and then using an [Activate] button to obtain activation permission from our Internet Activation server. You can easily move the activation of the software around between all of your computers with the Internet based activation and deactivation ability. For Network License users, the PCC only activates the Network License Manager ( NLM) (see below). You then install the SEL on all computers in your network that might like to use the software. No activation is needed on those computers. When they launch they simply get permission to run from the Network License Manager. Remember: You can always install the SEL on any computer where you might want to use it. But whether you have chosen a Flex License or a Network License, the SEL must reside on the actual computer to be used.
Installation for use with a Flex License
16
With a Flex License you will install the SEL, paste in your Product Control Code and
15
then click a button to perform an Internet Activation. You can then Deactivate and Activate the software to easily move the usage between the computers that you use.
Installation for use with a Network License
17
Multi-User Network Installations require that the SEL be installed on each computer where it will be operated, but you do not enter your Product Control Code into the SEL. Instead, for this type of installation, the SEL gets permission to run from the Network License Manager. So in summary, if you have chosen the Network License option: Install the Network License Manager on one of the computers on the local network with which all the other computers can communicate. Paste in the Product Control Code and use [Internet Activate] to activate the NLM. Install the Structural Engineering Library on all computers where you wish to use the software. DO NOT enter your Product Control Code on those computers. The software seeks and obtains permission to run from the NLM.
16
2.3
Single Computer Installation

For the most current installation information, please review this document located on our website:
http://www.enercalc.com/pdf/EC_V6_Install_SingleLicense.pdf
For documentation on the installation of previous versions, please use the following link:
http://www.enercalc.com/users.html
17
2.4
Network Installation
Use this section when you install a Network License for the Structural Engineering Library. For the most current installation information, please review this document located on our website:
http://www.enercalc.com/pdf/EC_V6_Install_Network.pdf
For documentation on the installation of previous versions, please use the following link:
http://www.enercalc.com/users.html
18
2.5
Network License Manager

Please use this link to get information on installation of the Network License Manager.
http://www.enercalc.com/pdf/ENERCALC_Network_License_Help.pdf
Click Here For A Video
19
2.6
Manual Activation
If you cannot activate the software using the simple [Internet Activate] method (because you have no connection, restricted access to the Internet due to a firewall, or your company prefers not to activate your installation this way), you can activate your software using the [Manual Activation] method:
Latest Manual Activation Information on Web
Click the [Manual Activation] button, and the instructions will be provided to you using the screen shown below:
20
NOTE: When using the Manual Activation method, the Manual Activation Code that you receive from ENERCALC can only be used to activate the specific machine that was used to make the Manual Activation Code request, because the request and the code actually contain the Computer Name and other data that is specific to that particular machine. However, you can still use the Internet Deactivate function to return a manually activated seat to your pool. And then you would be able to use that available seat from your pool to perform a normal Internet Activation on a different computer if desired.
21
2.7
Moving & Maintaining License Activation

Structural Engineering Library "seats" are single-user activations. Each seat can only be activated on one computer at a time. This section will assist you in moving your activation from one computer to another.
Latest Moving Your License Information on Web
When you originally activated the software, if you used the [Internet Activate] capability of the software, then you can use [Internet Deactivate] to return this activation to our server, so that it can be available to another computer. Follow these steps: Start the Structural Engineering Library. You will probably see the Project Assistant screen as shown below:
22
Click the [Close] button. Click License > Software Activation from the main menu as shown below:
You will now see the User Info & Licensing Information dialog as shown below:
.
23
Click the [Internet Deactivate] button to return your activation to our server. Note! You must allow the ENERCALC file EC6.EXE Internet access through your firewall or anti-virus software. After a moment, the system will indicate that the installation has been successfully deactivated by offering an [Internet Activate] button in the User Info & Licensing Information dialog as shown below:
Your activation has now been returned to our server, and you can go to another computer where the Structural Engineering Library is installed, and activate it by clicking License >Software Activation > [Internet Activate] from the main menu. For the most current installation information, please review this document located on our website:
http://www.enercalc.com/pdf/EC_V6_Install_Info.pdf
Part
III
25
Software Updates
Software Updates
26
3.1
Web Update
At ENERCALC we are continually improving and enhancing our software. It is fairly simple to make changes to the software here in our offices, however it can be overwhelming to ship thousands of CDs to our user base. To distribute the latest software builds to the entire user base, we depend on an Update program. The update is provided in two ways: Web Update System: This system is built into your Structural Engineering Library software package. It will check with our server to see if a newer version of the software is available and prompt you with an option to install it if available. See What Actually Happens below for a description of how it works. The Web Update system uses Internet protocol HTTP on port 80 to check if a newer version of the software is available and to transfer those files from our server to your computer as needed. You can configure the program to perform this check automatically every time you start the software, but it can also be performed on an on-demand basis if desired. Select Settings > Web Update Settings from the main menu to display the web update screen as shown below:
27
What actually happens during an update check: What actually happens during an update check is that the software runs a program in the ENERCALC program folder named EC6WebUpdate.exe. This program connects to our Internet servers using the "HTTP" protocol on port 80. It compares the version number you have installed with the current build of the software stored on our servers. If there is a newer build available, you are notified and upon approval, a small update installation program named EC6_WebUpdate.exe is transferred from our server to your computer. This file then executes to complete the file download and software updating/installation process. EC6WebUpdate.exe and EC6_WebUpdate.exe are digitally signed applications that are secure to run and are virus free. The actual updating program EC6_WebUpdate.exe that is downloaded from our server will need "write" access to the program installation folder. (It contains a Windows Vista/ Windows 7 manifest with this information.) Click here to check for updates: This button will download the updating program from our server. This program will check your computer for a non-expired Maintenance & Support Plan and update the software to the latest allowed version.
Software Updates
28
Note: The "WebUpdate" procedure may send information to ENERCALC, Inc. about your installation and use of the software licensed from ENERCALC, Inc. This may include any of the following: your ENERCALC assigned User Registration Number, the Installed Build Number of your ENERCALC software, Internet IP address of the computer that will receive the updated files, time usage for the various portions of the software, and potentially other information only related specifically to the use of the software license. Absolutely no files, configurations, settings, or other information not specifically regarding the usage of the ENERCALC license use will be sent. If you are concerned about this, please contact us for information on what is being sent. We have an OPEN policy on providing you with information showing what might be included. Check For Updates Automatically at Startup: This checkbox allows you to control whether or not your software will perform the automatic check for updates each time it is started.
Part
IV
Support & Maintenance
30
31
4.1
Maintenance & Support Plan

Our Maintenance & Support Plan (MSP) ensures that you will always have full technical support and the latest build of the software during the term of the plan. While your MSP is current, you will receive every new build, feature enhancement and improvement for your licensed software, ensuring you're always using the most current technology. You will have access to voice/fax/email technical assistance from our staff. You will also receive discounts on new software releases and additional software licenses. This is the easiest and most economical way for you and your company to keep your software investment current. Please see this web page for details on the Maintenance & Support Plan:
http://www.enercalc.com/support_maintenance.html
32
4.2
Getting Assistance
There are several ways to get assistance with using the Structural Engineering Library. HOWEVER, with the exception of referring to the program documentation and reviewing the FAQ section on the website, all options require that your Maintenance and Support Plan is current. Refer to the program documentation. Contact ENERCALC Technical Services by email: From the main menu:
From your email program: support@enercalc.com Contact ENERCALC Technical Services by fax: 949-645-3881 Contact ENERCALC Technical Services by phone: 949-645-0441, Extension #3 Review the "Frequently Asked Questions" (FAQ) page on our website:
33
http://www.enercalc.com/support_knowledge.html
34
4.3
Viewing Enhancements and Changes to the Software

The program offers a detailed list of revisions that have been made to the software. Click Help > Enhancement/Change History. The following window will be displayed:
This window is dynamically built by calling all subsystem modules in the software. In this manner the subsystems themselves contain the information on the changes that have been made. This list can be set to display enhancements only, or it can display enhancements and changes/corrections. When the list is set to display both enhancements and changes/ corrections, it can be sorted by version or by module.
Part
Getting Started
36
Getting Started
37
5.1
System Overview & Design Philosophy

The Structural Engineering Library is a collection of modules that provides analysis and design functionality for components of buildings. Walls, columns, beams, footings, diaphragms, frames, and other common elements can be thoroughly engineered through the use of the modules in this package. If you are a typical engineer whose work consists of a regular flow of small and medium-sized projects, this package is designed specifically for you. As an engineer you will find that each module combines the governing code provisions, mathematical analysis processes, and commonly available construction materials into a simple and effective "calcpad" style fill-in-the-blanks program. You can feel partially relieved that the software will consistently perform all the required checks that may be skipped over when doing repetitive hand calculations....especially when fatigue sets in and a deadline is near! You can enjoy the time to do more exhaustive design studies, come up with safer and more economical designs, and enjoy clearly documented calculations for review and archiving. This software is not a "black box" program. Each calculation is designed to be a "visible calcpad" where you can work with the data and immediately view the resulting calculations. Automatic design is provided in most modules, and is intended primarily to automate tedious iterative tasks. You, as an experienced structural engineer or architect, can quickly enter and change member sizes and other design parameters and view the results. In this way, the Structural Engineering Library maximizes the use of your time and design skills by enabling you to quickly define a concept and then make necessary modifications to refine it into a final design.
Getting Started
38
5.2
Evaluation Mode
Until the Structural Engineering Library is licensed, it operates in Evaluation mode. Evaluation mode indicates that no registration information has been entered. A Product Control Code (PCC) is necessary in order to activate an installation of the Structural Engineering Library. The PCC is issued by ENERCALC, Inc. to a licensed user of the software. When entered into the appropriate dialog, the PCC will allow the software to be activated such that it runs in Licensed mode rather than in Evaluation mode. This design allows the software to be installed and evaluated prior to purchasing a license. When a license is purchased, the new license holder just needs to enter their activation code to allow the software to operate as a fully registered and licensed version. While in Evaluation mode the software operates EXACTLY like the licensed mode except for three differences. The software pops up a window at random times during the session to remind the user they are using an evaluation version and that they would be so very happy if they purchased a license. The printouts display a watermark message noting that they were created by an unlicensed version which is for evaluation only, and not for commercial use. The Project Print functionality is not enabled in the Evaluation Mode.
39
5.3
About Our Documentation

Documentation of your software package is essential for your successful and pleasant use of our products. We try hard to supply you, now and on an ongoing basis, with detailed information on all aspects of the software. To support this commitment, we provide documentation of your software in multiple forms: A Windows Help system file named ENERCALC.CHM is installed with your software. This help system may be accessed by clicking Help > Dynamic Help from the main menu. A User's Manual in Adobe Acrobat PDF file format is available for download at any time from our website. An Online help system is available at Printed Documentation Printed documentation is not provided with ENERCALC products. This is in keeping with the nearly universal industry move away from printed documentation. Updating your Documentation The most up-to-date documentation for our software products is always available in electronic form. Whenever the software is updated with the built-in Web Update system, part of the process includes transferring the latest documentation to your computer. This ensures that the content that you view by clicking Help > Dynamic Help from the main menu is current and coordinated. In addition, you always have the option to download the latest Adobe Acrobat PDF documentation file from our website by using the following link:
http://www.enercalc.com/pdf/SEL60_DOCS.PDF www.enercalc.com/sel_help
Getting Started
40
5.4
Building Codes Supported

As of October 2011, Version 6.11.10.16 software supports the following codes and design standards: Design Standards: American Concrete Institute publication ACI 318-05/08 American Concrete Institute publication ACI 530-05/08 American Forest & Paper Association publication NDS 2005 Edition American Society of Civil Engineers publication ASCE/SEI 7-05 American Institute of Steel Construction publication Thirteenth Edition which contains specification ANSI/AISC 360-05 General Building Codes: International Code Council publication International Building Code 2006 and 2009 editions. IBC references the above publications in Chapter 35. The modifications to each referenced design standard have been incorporated if applicable to the functionality provided by the individual calculation modules. California Building Standards Commission publication 2007 California Building Code and 2010 California Building Code. Chapter 19 references ACI 318, Chapter 21 references ACI 530, Chapter 22 references ANSI/AISC 360-05, Chapter 23 references NDS, and Chapter 16 which defines the forces on buildings is essentially the same as ASCE 7-05.
41
5.5
Learning the Structural Engineering Library

There are several sources of information that will assist you with learning to use the Structural Engineering Library Version 6. A series of tutorial videos is available at our website:
http://www.enercalc.com/training_videos.html
This documentation. An Internet version of the help system is available at:

http://www.enercalc.com/sel_help
Responses to "Frequently Asked Questions" are available at our website:

http://www.enercalc.com/faq_help/
The Online Community that is built into the software:
Getting Started
42
5.6
Introductory Videos
We continue to add topics to a series of videos that discuss all portions of the software. To access nearly 40 videos please click here: Here is a partial view of what you will see....
http://www.enercalc.com/training_videos.html
43
5.7
Request for Suggestions

Although our intentions are to provide you with the best product possible, it is likely that there may be areas of this User's Guide and the software itself that could be improved to better suit your needs, be made simpler to operate, easier to understand, or support engineering technologies that have emerged since this publication. To call these to our attention and to offer suggestions for improvement, we sincerely request that you send us your thoughts. Please address your comments to: Michael D. Brooks, P.E., S.E. President ENERCALC, Inc.
support@enercalc.com
Post Office Box 188 Corona del Mar, CA 92625
Part
VI
45
Program Overview
Program Overview
46
6.1
Introduction
The Structural Engineering Library is a collection of modules (also referred to as "calcsheets") that provide functionality for the analysis and design of components of buildings. Walls, columns, beams, footings, diaphragms, frames, and other common elements can be thoroughly engineered through the use of the modules in this package. If you are a typical engineer, whose work consists of a monthly flow of small and mediumsized projects, this package is designed especially for you. As an engineer, you will find that each module combines the governing code provisions, mathematical analysis processes, and commonly available construction materials into a simple and effective "calcpad" style fill-in-the-blanks program. You can feel partially relieved that the software will consistently perform all the required checks that may be skipped over when doing repetitive hand calculations. You can enjoy the time to do more exhaustive design studies, come up with safer and more economical designs, and enjoy clearly documented calculations for review and archiving. This software is not a "black box" program. Each calculation is designed to be a "visible calcpad" where you can work with the data and immediately view the resulting calculations. Automatic design is provided in most modules, and is intended primarily to automate tedious iterative tasks. You, as an experienced structural engineer or architect, can quickly enter and change member sizes and other design parameters and view the results. In this way, the Structural Engineering Library maximizes the use of your time and design skills by enabling you to quickly define a concept and then make necessary modifications to refine it into a final design. The "Calcpad" Approach When the Structural Engineering Library was designed in 1983, our concept was revolutionary.....design it like an engineer's calculation pad. When an engineer prepares a calculation, the finished product is a neat and organized sheet of paper that follows the design flow from load tabulation, force and stress calculation, to the final adequacy check of the structural component that will satisfy the task. At the time, all other competing programs were aging versions of mainframe programs that had been modified to run on microcomputers. Many of those programs executed "batch" design, where the user entered all the data, told the computer to run the program, and then opened a crude file to review the results. ENERCALC was unique in that the input and output was mixed on the same screen....easy to see at a glance. But the most revolutionary aspect was the tremendous speed it offered to prepare calculations. This great speed was due to the fact that you could change a number and instantly see all the updated results on the screen. Moving forward, the current Version 6 for Windows maintains that same fill-in-the-blanks approach with instant recalculation of results. When using any of the approximately 30 calculation modules, all input data and output results are presented on the same screen
47
and viewed just by selecting a tab that groups the information. Whenever you change an input value, the entire module is recalculated and the results are immediately visible. Thanks to efficient programming and fast modern computers, incredibly complex structural analysis and design is performed in a split second. This instant updating also happens when you are viewing graphical sketches of designs or stress diagrams.....after any change, the graphics are instantly updated. A Typical Worksession In order of occurrence, here are the steps in using the software: 1. Start the program. 2. The Project Assistant is displayed where you can choose to use the last calculation, the last project, a recent project, or create a new project. 3. A project is selected and you view the Project Manager. Here you can add new calculations, edit existing calculations, insert non-calculation items into the project (such as Microsoft Word or Excel files, Adobe Acrobat PDF files, or scanned images), and initiate project printing capabilities. 4. Editing or adding a calculation takes you to the calculation sheet for one of the modules. 5. Using the calculation sheet, you enter data on the top set of tabs while reviewing results and graphics on the bottom set. 6. When the structural calculation is complete, you can print it and/or save it to the project. 7. You can always return to the Project Manager where you can add/edit/delete/print other items within the current project, or save the current project and open a new one.
Program Overview
48
6.2
User Information
It is important that you enter information about yourself and your company into the program. You can access the entry dialog by clicking Settings > User Information from the main menu.
Please note that the "License Owner Name" you see in the above screen was automatically generated after the Product Control Code was entered. This information is used in the Technical Support forms and emails to automatically fill in your identifying information when using those methods for contacting us.
49
6.3
Program Settings
The Settings item in the main menu provides access to several selections that control how various aspects of the Structural Engineering Library operates. A selection of one of the first four items will open the Program Settings window and preselect the appropriate tab for the chosen item.
General Settings & File Locations
Program Overview
50
Default Project File Location: Specifies the default location where the program will point when using File > Open or File > New from the main menu. This location can be wherever you desire, however we ask you to remember that Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Windows 7 have introduced new suggested locations for storing user data. The path to the Default Project File Location shown on the screen capture above is: C: \Users\Chris\Documents\ENERCALC Project Files\. Because modern operating systems allow multiple users per computer, Microsoft suggests that software manufacturers create their own folder under Documents and set that as the default location for user-created files. The program conforms to this recommendation by suggesting an appropriate directory during the installation process.
Database File Location: Specifies where the program should look for the steel database, wood database, and other files that contain the databases of standard values. This location needs to be accessible to all users on a specific computer. Microsoft suggests that software manufacturers set the following as the default location for data files that are referenced by the software, but not modified by the user: C:\Users\Public\Documents.
51
The path to the Database File Location shown on the screen capture above is: C: \Users\Public\Documents\ENERCALC Common Data Files\.
Load Database File Location: Specifies where the program should look for the load combination database file and other files that are potentially edited by the user. Because this is a file that can be customized by the user, the default location for this file is the same as the default location offered for storing Project Files. The path to the Load Database File Location shown on the screen capture above is: C: \Users\Chris\Documents\ENERCALC Data Files\.
Automatically create backup files: With this box checked the software will automatically create a backup file with the EC6_BKUP file extension in the same folder as where the original master file is located. The backup file is created when a file is OPENED.
Automatically create & save calculation reports when saving a calculation: When this option is selected, the program will produce and store a report for each calculation when it is saved. This offers the convenience of instant Project Printing, but requires some additional disc space. The alternative is to deselect this option, in which case the reports will need to be compiled by issuing a Regenerate All command at the time of Project Printing. This method will conserve a little disc space, but will require some additional time to regenerate when a Project Print command is issued.
Use memory mapped Project Files during program operation: This option is particularly oriented toward users who store Project Files on network drives, USB memory sticks, or other storage locations that are not on the local hard drive. When storing files in this way, some users experience slow performance within the Structural Engineering Library. This is not an issue with the Structural Engineering Library, but rather with the file handling system of the network or attached storage device. If this applies to you, try selecting the option to "Use memory mapped Project Files". When this option is selected, the program reads an entire Project File into RAM (Random Access Memory) on your computer, and it can greatly improve the performance of your computer when running the Structural Engineering Library. When this option is deselected, Structural Engineering Library Project Files continued to be saved only to the source drive and location.
Calculations added at current highlight, highlighted calc moved down: This applies to the way calculations are inserted when using the Project Manager. When this box is checked and you use the [+Add] button, it adds a new calculation to the project, and the calculation is inserted directly above that position. What you see is that the new calculation takes that spot in the list, and the highlighted item is moved down. If this box is unchecked and you use the [+Add] button, the new calculation is inserted BELOW the highlighted item.
Program Overview
52
Display Size Display Settings: Provides options to set the display resolution. Disable Sketch Sub-system: Provides a checkbox to disable the sketch sub-system within the Structural Engineering Library. This is provided for the specific purpose of addressing a rare problem that occurred only with the Windows Vista operating system.
Printing & Title Block
Title Block: These six entries correspond to the six lines in the upper-left corner of the printout.
53
Logo File: Provides an option to specify a graphics file to be printed at the LEFT edge of the title block. If used, the six lines of Title Block information will be printed immediately to the right of the logo. Logos can be Windows BMP, JPEG, GIF, and WMF formats. When a logo is specified, the height is adjusted to fit into the title block area and the rightside "floats" according to the width of the image. What to Print - Title Block: Check this box to print the title block at the top of the report. With this item unchecked the printout begins with the calculation title bar (shown as "Masonry Column" in the image above) What to Print - Date & Time: Check this box to print the computer date and time on the report as shown below:
Select Printing Color Mode: This sets the default mode for printed reports created from the Structural Engineering Library.
Program Overview
54
Web Update
Click here to check for updates: This button will download the updating program from our server. This program will check your computer for a non-expired Maintenance & Support Plan and update the software to the latest version. Click Here for web update overview Internal Values Internal Filenames: Displays folder names and file names for the current configuration.
26
55
Program Overview
56
6.4
Files & File Locations

Project Files The Structural Engineering Library uses a single file to store the project information and all the calculations and items that are created as a part of that "Project". This file uses an "EC6" extension to identify it as an EnerCalc Version 6 file. To backup an ENERCALC Project File simply copy the .EC6 file to the desired backup location. To have the system automatically create a backup file, activate the checkbox labeled Automatically create backup files on the Settings > General Settings dialog. As the Structural Engineering Library advances in capabilities, the file formats used will change, but we will always provide conversion programs for previously saved Project Files. General Comments Each ENERCALC Project File contains all information on a Project. There are no other files you will need to keep track of. Always remember that the Project Manager is showing you the Divisions and calculations for the current Project. It is NOT showing you a disk directory structure. There is no Save item on the File menu. After you have edited a calculation, you can either click [Save Only] or [Save & Exit] within the individual modules. Either one will save the calculation data to the Project File.
Database Files A number of database files are supplied with the Structural Engineering Library. These files contain AISC section properties, NDS stress grades, wood section properties, seismic acceleration data, USA cities & Zip Codes, and other files. These files are not to be edited or modified in any way by the user.
User-Created Database Files The user can create User Defined database files to store their own steel sections, wood sections and wood stress databases. These files are created and stored in the same folder as the other database files. User defined database files are differentiated from the standard database files that are delivered with the software by inserting the word "_USER" in the filename.
57
6.5
Project Assistant
When you launch the Structural Engineering Library the Project Assistant is displayed by default, as shown below.
This single dialog allows you instant access to prior Project Files, the last Project File, the last-used calculation, or other functions to create or manage Project Files. Please see the numbered references below the graphic for specific descriptions.
(1) Click to immediately load the last Project File that you worked on. (2) Click to immediately load the last Project File that you worked on and open the last calculation you worked on.
Program Overview
58
(3) This list shows the most recent Project Files that you loaded on this computer, with the most recent Project File at the top of the list. Double-click on any item in the list to open that Project File. (4) Click to open the highlighted Project File in the list. (5) Click to remove the highlighted file from the Recent Projects list. (6) Click to open a Pick List that displays ALL Project Files in the various folders that you have used in the past. See the section Main Menu > File 72 for a description of the Pick List. (7) Click to open a Windows File Open dialog that allows you to navigate through disks and folders to locate and open a Project File. (8) Click to open the Windows File Create dialog that allows you to navigate through disks and folders and create a new ENERCALC Project File. (9) Click to choose an ENERCALC calculation module and create a single calculation for quick preparation and printing only. NOTE: Calculations created in this way CANNOT be saved. (10) Uncheck this box if you do not wish to automatically display the Project Assistant at startup. To again have the Project Assistant automatically displayed at startup, click File > Display Project Assistant and then activate the checkbox to Show Project Assistant at program start up.
59
6.6
Databases
The Structural Engineering Library contains several databases that you can use in the various modules. To view the databases click Databases > (database) from the main menu. See below.
Steel Database The steel section database is available in all applicable steel modules. It contains typical AISC rolled sections available in the United States. These sections are also shown in the 13th Edition AISC Steel Construction Manual.
Program Overview
60
Wood Section Database The wood section database is available in all applicable wood modules. It contains typical wood sections available in the United States. These sections are also shown in the 2005 NDS. Also included are manufactured sections, however the list of those sections is only updated occasionally.
Wood Stress Database The wood stress database is available in all applicable wood modules. It contains typical wood stress grades as defined in the 2005 NDS. Also included are manufactured sections, however the list of those sections is only updated occasionally.
61
Masonry Database This is a reference table only. It consists of data for common hollow concrete masonry units:
Load Combination Database This is the database of named load combination sets that can be automatically retrieved into a calculation. A named load combination set can be established as a default and will be used whenever a new calculation is created in the Project.
Program Overview
62
63
6.7
Screen Layout
The ENERCALC Structural Engineering Library user interface is divided into a Main Menu and a Working Area. The Working Area is used to display the calculation module that you are currently editing. When you choose to view the Project Manager, it is displayed on the left side of the Working Area. See more to follow. The Main Menu is described in much more detail here: Main Menu description
71
Working Area - Showing Project Manager Immediately after a Project File is opened the Project Manager is displayed. As you can see in the image below, the Project Manager occupies a portion of the left side of the screen. The Project Manager provides you with the ability to control the contents of your Project File. Double-click any calculation to open the associated module and edit the parameters
Program Overview
64
of that calculation. Please click here Manager.
93
to jump to detailed information for the Project
After a calculation is selected for editing, the Project Manager automatically collapses, and the window fills with the user interface for that particular calculation module as shown below:
65
NOTE: It is normal for the Project Manager to hide while a calculation is being edited. For a review of using a typical calculation screen click here
68
Program Overview
66
6.8
Generating Reports
In the Structural Engineering Library, the term "report" refers to the results documents created by the program in either printed or PDF format. For each of the ENERCALC modules, a report can be generated in different ways, depending on your intent. The report creation buttons at the top of a module offer options for the common methods of generating a report from the currently loaded module for immediate review. See below:
In order from left to right, the bubbled icons do the following: Create a report preview, so you can review the report on-screen prior to printing Create a report as an Adobe Acrobat PDF file Create a report and send directly to the printer. It is important to understand that reports are actually created and saved when you click the [Save Only] or the [Save & Exit] buttons in the upper-right corner of all modules:
Clicking either of these buttons causes a full report for the current module to be created and saved into the Project File along with all of the input data for that module. This is how the printouts are prepared for instant viewing and batch printing in the Project Printing system. EVALUATION MODE NOTE: Batch printing is not enabled in Evaluation mode, but it IS still possible to print reports individually. When the software is operating in Evaluation mode, the reports are stored in the Project File with a watermark noting that the user has created the report with an evaluation version. If you are a licensed user, you can remove this watermark two different ways...either: Reload the calculation and click [Save], or Click File > Regenerate Reports > All from the main menu to regenerate all reports for the entire project. Either of these methods will regenerate the report without the watermark and save it for printing.
67
Program Overview
68
6.9
General Calculation Screen Usage

Please refer to the typical screen below and the numbered items that relate screen areas to their descriptions:
(1) Indicates the module that you are working in. (2) Indicates the name of the licensed owner of this installation & activation of the software. (3) From left to right: Access to help system: Opens the help system and displays the section specific to this module. Report Preview: Displays the report for this module in a new window for your review. Create PDF Report: Creates a report for this module, prompts for filename, creates Acrobat PDF, and then displays it for your review. Print Report: Prints the report for this module directly to your selected printer. Properties: Offers a selection of items to include in the report. (4) From left to right: Cancel all changes: Cancels all changes made to this module since the last save, closes the module without saving, and returns to the Project Manager. If this calculation module was just Added to the Project File, and if it was never saved, then
69
this option will cause the calculation to be removed without saving. Create a new calculation: Uses the current calculation data to create a new calculation item in the Project Manager. Save Only: Saves the current Project File (to capture all the data entered into this module), creates a report (which can be printed at a later time), and keeps the module open for further editing. Save & Exit: Saves the current Project File (to capture all the data entered into this module), creates a report (which can be printed at a later time), closes the module, and returns to the Project Manager. (5) Data input tabs: Click these tabs to move to various categories of data input. (6) Major Result Category Tabs: Select between major categories of result data to view; numerical values, sketches or diagrams. (7) Numeric Result Tabs: Click these tabs to view the various components of calculated results.
Part
VII
71
Main Menu
The main menu of the Structural Engineering Library is always displayed.
The menu offers the following selections. Click an item below to jump to that help section page. File 72 Settings 79 : Databases 80 Tools 84 : License 86 : Help 87 : : To create, load, close and print Project Files. To establish settings, user information and default values : To view the various databases supplied with the software To access utilities provided with the software To directly access the licensing control window To access the help system, technical support options, Knowledge Base with FAQs, Enhancement/Change History and the ENERCALC website.
Main Menu
72
7.1
File
Last Project: Opens the last used Project File. Recent Projects: Provides a list of Project Files that were recently opened.
Pick Project: The software remembers all prior folders on your computer (and other computers) that were accessed to load Project Files. This item opens a window that shows those folders and the ENERCALC Project Files contained within them to allow you one-stop selection of a Project File from your commonly used locations.
73
Open Project: Opens a standard Windows File Open dialog allowing you to navigate your disk drives and open a Project File.
Main Menu
74
New Project: Opens a standard Windows File Create dialog allowing you to navigate your disk drives and specify the name of a Project File to create.
Quick Calc: Allows you to open a calculation module to perform a calculation that WILL NOT be saved. After making this selection you will see the typical ENERCALC module selection window. Simply click on your selection and the module will be loaded. Your entered data cannot be saved, so it will need to be printed if a permanent copy is needed.
75
(image from Build 6.11.10.16) Save Project as New: Allows you to save the currently open Project File as a new file using a different name. Opens a standard Windows File Create dialog allowing you to navigate your disk drives and specify the name of the Project File to create.
Main Menu
76
Close Project: Closes the currently open Project File (making sure any unsaved data is purged). Print Setup: Displays a typical Windows Printer Selection dialog to specify the printer to be used for this work session.
Print Project: Opens the Project Printing 128 Manager.
77
Regenerate Reports: This selection is used to regenerate printouts so they will be updated and displayed correctly in the Project Printing Manager. It can be used any time the following information has changed: Project Information in the GENERAL Division of the Project Manager for the currently open Project File Title block information filled in using Settings > Printing & Title Block from the main menu There is also a third situation where this command can come in handy. When running in Evaluation mode, the software adds a watermark on the background of all printouts. This watermark says "Evaluation Version" and "Unlicensed Usage", so the report is inconvenient to use for submittal purposes. When the user later runs the software in Licensed mode, those reports with the "Evaluation Version" watermark remain in the Project File until they are reopened and saved. This can be a laborious process if the Project File contains many calculations. So the easier way to remove the watermarks in one pass is to use the Regenerate Reports command. When you click File > Regenerate Reports > All, the program will automatically save and close any open calculations. Then the program will show a progress window as it regenerates all the reports in your Project File:
Display Project Assistant: This option displays the Project Assistant which offers a convenient way of beginning work with a Project File.
Main Menu
78
Exit: Offers the option to save any pending work, then closes the currently open Project File, and exits the software.
79
7.2
Settings
Most of these items are covered in another section of this help document. Please click on an item in the list below to jump to that section. General Settings 49 : Defines file locations, backup file creation and behavior items in the Project Manager. Printing & Title Block block.
52
: Provides the ability for the user to define the look of their title
Engineer's Stamp: Allows the user to upload a graphic image of their Professional Engineer's stamp for inclusion on printed reports. Display Settings: Provides options to configure the software for the resolution of the monitor being used. Web Update Settings 26 : Allows control over behavior of web update system and direct access to the update installation program on the web. Default Values: Provides control over the values that serve as the defaults for each individual calculation module. User Information
48
: Provides access to user information.
Utilities: This selection provides items that are mostly used for support and maintenance of the software. At the time of this documentation writing, the only Utility item available is to start a process of registering components used by the S.E.L. with the operating system.
Main Menu
80
7.3
Databases
This menu allows viewing of various databases supplied with the software. Please click here
59
for information on the databases.
81
7.3.1
Load Combination Database

The Load Combination Database is used to manage the load combinations that you can use across all of your Project Files. The load combinations specified in this section are stored in a separate file and ARE NOT specific to a particular Project File. With the Load Combination Database you can create many load combination sets. These are listed in the Code Reference column. For each set, you can then specify the individual load combinations for both factored load and service load cases, which are used for LRFD and ASD respectively (also referred to as strength design and allowable stress design). Please see the descriptions for the numbered keynotes on the screen capture below.
(1) This area lists the load combination sets that you have specified. We have named the column Code Reference because typically the load combinations specified to be run for a particular project or design are specified by the governing building code for the project location. (2) Use these buttons to add or delete load combination sets. The button with the triangle symbol means "Change" or "Edit" and is used to edit the displayed reference name for the set.
Main Menu
82
(3) This is the area that displays all the load combinations for the Factored or Service level load analysis types. (4) Use these buttons to add or delete individual load combinations. The button with the triangle symbol means "Change" or "Edit" and is used to edit the numeric factors applied to each type of load for the load combination that is highlighted. When clicking the [Add] or [Edit] button, the following dialog is displayed:
Use this dialog to specify the reference name and the values for each load factor. (5) Click the [Factored Combinations] or [Service Level Combinations] buttons to select the category of load combinations to display. (6) Use the button to make the highlighted name in the Code Reference column the default combination set that will be used in all new ENERCALC calculations.
Using Load Combinations When creating a NEW calculation in the Project Manager (or when using Quick Calc), the default load combination set is automatically loaded into the Load Combination tab in the module. In the image below you can see that the load combinations have been loaded and are displayed on Load Combinations tab in the Masonry Column module. The design method has been set to LRFD, so the software is displaying Factored Combinations.
83
We have clicked the [Change Load Combination] button (a triangle) to pop open a list of the available load combination sets from the Load Combination database. Selecting one of them from this pop-up list will load those new load combinations into this particular calculation only.
Main Menu
84
7.4
Tools
This menu item provides access to useful tools that are supplied with the Structural Engineering Library.
Calculator: We supply a Reverse Notation Calculator (RPN) for engineers to use for intermediate calculations when entering data. RPN calculators are the most commonly used among engineers because they allow faster mathematics solutions when nested (parenthetical) calculations are used.
For more information on Reverse Polish Notation try these links: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Reverse_Polish_notation
85
http://www.hpmuseum.org/rpn.htm Reset Calc Defaults: This command resets the default values for the current calculation to the hard-coded internal default values. It may be a useful tool in some troubleshooting situations. Remove Saved Reports from Project File: This command removes any reports that have been saved in the current Project File. It can be helpful in terms of reducing file size if a Project File is to be emailed, but it will require that the reports be regenerated before they can be printed.
Main Menu
86
7.5
License
Displays the licensing and activation menu. Please use this link to jump to detailed section: Licensing 16
87
7.6
Help
Dynamic Help: Displays the help system for the software that is installed on your computer. Web Documentation (most up-to-date): Displays the most up-to-date help information located on our website.
Main Menu
88
Web FAQ Pages: Provides a direct link to the Frequently Asked Questions section at www.enercalc.com. Download PDF Docs: Downloads the PDF version of the documentation for the software currently available at our website. The documentation on our website will always be for the latest available version. "For Our Users" Web Page: Provides a link directly to the "For Our Users" page of our website, which offers information on current builds, Customer Information, Version 6 Software Installation & Update Links, Version 6 Installation Info & FAQ links, info on Maintenance Plans & Upgrades, Documentation Links, Links to PDF Files of Relevant Information and Useful Forms, and links for Prior Version Software Reinstallation. "Training Videos" Web Page: Provides a link directly to the "Training Videos" page of our website, which offers videos on topics such as Installation, General Operation, Using Project the Manager, Designing Beams, Columns, Foundations, Slender Walls, working with some of the Miscellaneous modules, and working with External Files.
89
Create Tech Support Email: Provides you with a Tech Support form to fill out. When finished, the data is transferred to an email form to send to our Tech Support Group. (Note: Some computers and email software will not be able to paste the information into your email program. This is not an ENERCALC issue. In those situations, feel free to compose an email to support@enercalc.com directly from your email program, and please remember to indicate your "KW" User Registration number on all correspondence.)
Create Tech Support Fax: Provides you with a form that you can fill out, print and fax directly to ENERCALC (or transmit electronically).
Main Menu
90
Check for Updates: Immediately runs the update check program named EC6WebUpdate.exe, which resides in the ENERCALC program installation folder. If a newer build is found, a window will be displayed prompting you to decide if you want to continue to update your software. If there is no newer build of the software available, then you will be informed that your installation is currently up-to-date. Online Community: Opens the Online Community dialog where users can share tips, suggestions, ideas, etc. RSS News Feed: Opens the RSS News Feed dialog where users can receive announcements and other pieces of information that are distributed to all users via the feed. Enhancement/Change History: Opens a window that lists revisions and enhancements that have been performed on the software. Click here 34 to access a specific section with additional information. Allowed Version Description: Provides a thorough description of the terms "Installed
91
Build" and "Allowed Version" now reported by the Structural Engineering Library. Licensing: Displays the licensing and activation system window. Click here a specific section with additional information.
86
to access
About: Displays a general window giving information about software version, copyright, licensed user, activation status, and contact information for ENERCALC.
Part
VIII
93
Project Manager
The Project Manager is displayed on the left side of the ENERCALC screen when a Project File has been opened. The Project Manger provides the ability to create and modify a single Project File that can contain a set of calculations and external items for a specific project. The layout, which will be ever-improving, is designed to allow an ENERCALC Project File to be a single collection point for documents relating to the load development and structural design of a building or other structure. The behavior of the Project Manager has been enhanced by introducing the ability to display and hide the Project Manager on-demand. This offers the following advantages: Larger area is available for use in the Project Manager when it is displayed. More verbose calculation descriptions can be provided with fewer cryptic abbreviations. Greater selection of "project level" operations buttons can be displayed. More efficient organization of GENERAL Division, LOADS & FORCES Division and custom Divisions within the Project Manager. Larger area available for the display of input and results when Project Manager is hidden. More verbose descriptions of input variables can now be provided. Less on-screen congestion and less need for horizontal scroll bars in results tables.
Components that all Project Files AUTOMATICALLY contain are:

GENERAL Division (Only one can exist in a Project File) A storage location for pieces of information pertaining to areas of the entire project, such as: Project Info, Building Department Contact Info, Designer Notes, Revisions, Client, Designer. Future additions LOADS & FORCES Division (Only one can exist in a Project File) A storage location for pieces of information pertaining to areas of the entire project, such as: General forces for the project including Snow Loads, Wind Loads and Seismic Loads. Live load reductions. Future additions
Components that any Project File CAN contain are:

Project Manager
94
Custom Divisions (An unlimited number can exist in a Project File) Storage locations (folders) for organizing user-generated calculations and external items. Can be created, named, copied, organized, expanded, collapsed, and deleted. Are typically named in ways that are meaningful to the designer and that suit the specific project. Are generally populated with calculations and external items. Provide a convenient way to selectively control project printing operations for logical sets of calculations. Every new Project File is automatically populated with one Division named "Calculations". Calculations (An unlimited number can exist in a Project File) User-generated calculations that are created using the built-in ENERCALC modules and are stored in the Custom Divisions. Can be created, moved between Divisions, and deleted. Can be copied to serve as the basis for a new calculation with similar input data. Can be imported from one Project File to another. Can be printed singly or in batch mode using the Project Printing Manager. External Items (An unlimited number can exist in a Project File) User-generated external files that are created using external programs and then stored in the Custom Divisions. Can consist of MS Word documents, MS Excel spreadsheets, Adobe Acrobat PDFs, and scanned documents/images. Can be embedded within the Project File for maximum portability, or can be linked to the Project File to minimize file size. Can be created, moved between Divisions, and deleted. Please see the descriptive keynotes on the following screen capture for information on various areas of the Project Manager. Detailed descriptions are contained in the sections of this topic.
95
Project Manager
96
(1) Project Printing: These buttons allow you to print the report for the selected calculation, or open the Project Printing system, which allows you to review all report pages for all calculation items in the entire project. Click here 128 to review the specific section on Project Printing. (2) Buttons to Add, Copy, Edit & Delete Individual Calculations: These buttons allow you to add, copy, edit and delete ENERCALC calculations or external source items (such as Excel sheets) in the selected Division. Click here 114 to review specific section. (3) Sort Options: These three tabs sort your Project File content by Division grouping, Type of calculation (Steel Beam, Concrete Column, Excel sheet, etc.) or Material (Concrete, Steel, Wood, etc.). Click here 116 to review specific section. Note that the [Add], [Copy], and [Delete] options are not available in the Type view or the Material view. (4) Expand & Contract Tree: These two buttons fully expand or fully contract the tree structure to display or hide the full contents of the Project File. (5) GENERAL Division: The GENERAL Division is automatically created in each new Project File. There can only be one GENERAL Division, and its purpose is to contain and organize certain hard-coded pieces of general information that apply to the Project as a whole. Click here 99 to review the section describing these items. The screen capture below shows a view of the Project Manager with the GENERAL Division expanded to display its contents:
(6) LOADS & FORCES Division: The LOADS & FORCES Division is also automatically created in each new Project File. There can only be one LOADS & FORCES Division, and its purpose is to contain and organize load related calculations. The screen capture below shows a view of the Project Manager with the LOADS & FORCES Division expanded to display its contents:
97
(7) Calculation Division: The Calculations Division is also automatically created in each new Project File, but it is created merely as a user-convenience. It can be thought of as a "custom" Division, because its name can be changed and it can be moved or deleted. The user is free to create as many custom Divisions as the Project warrants, and to name them as best suits the Project. (8) Calculation List: This is the main list that displays all the calculation items that you have added into your project. It allows you to organize your calculations into Divisions. See image below for another look at two Divisions labeled "Beams" and "Columns". Columns shows a [+] button to its left, indicating that the tree containing the calculations in that Division is compressed. Click here 106 to review the section describing these items.
Project Manager
98
(9) Move Item in List: These buttons move the highlighted calculation up and down within the list. Click here 120 to review specific section. (10) Import Calculations from other Project Files: Click here 123 to review specific section.
99
8.1
General Division
This Division contains a list of items that describe the entire project: Project Information 100 : Allows entry of general information about the project. Client Information 101 : Allows entry of information specific to the engineer's client. Building Code Information 102 : Allows entry of information relating to the building code, jurisdiction and building official's contact information. Designer Notes 103 : Allows entry of up to 18 specific notes assigned by a specific person on a certain date. Revisions 104 : Allows entry of up to 18 specific revisions assigned by a specific person on a certain date.
Project Manager
100
8.1.1
Project Information
Allows you to enter information specific to your project. This data is specific to your Project File.
101
8.1.2
Client Information
Allows you to enter information on your client for a specific project. This data is specific to your Project File.
Project Manager
102
8.1.3
Building Code Information

Allows you to select the Governing Building Code and enter various information items pertaining to the public jurisdiction where your project is located. This data is specific to your Project File.
103
8.1.4
Designer Notes
Allows you to enter up to 18 distinct notes on the project, each with a specific author and creation date. This data is specific to your Project File.
Project Manager
104
8.1.5
Revision List
Allows you to enter up to 18 distinct revision explanations on the project, each with a specific author and creation date. This data is specific to your Project File.
105
8.2
Loads & Forces Division

The LOADS & FORCES Division contains a growing number of calculations including Snow Loads, Live Load Reduction, Wind Loads, and Seismic Loads.
See specific descriptions under Calculation Modules > Loads & Forces Division 105 .
Project Manager
106
8.3
Calculation List
The Calculation List is the main Project Manager view that you will use when building your calculation sets for projects. Most of a normal work session consists of adding and editing calculations in the list. Please see the notes below as well as the following sections to learn what each button provides and how to manage the list of calculations.
107
Project Manager
108
Divisions: Divisions are the main organizational category for calculations. These are the left-most text item in the calculation list and will display either a [+] or [-] to the left of their name. Divisions can be created, copied, renamed, moved, and deleted. Calculations must always exist within a Division, but they can be moved freely between Divisions. Click Here 110 for the specific information section. The screen capture below illustrates an example of how a Division can be renamed with a title that is meaningful to your project:
Adding, Deleting, Copying: The four buttons shown below allow you to add, copy, edit, or delete calculations and external items. Click here 114 for the specific information section.
Sorting by Division, Type and Material: Click one of these tabs to change the sorting view of the calculations in your project. Click here 116 for the specific information section.
Changing Calculation and Division Order: The buttons you see below are used to move the highlighted calculation or Division up or down in the list. When moving a calculation downward, if moving a calculation would tend to replace a Division name, then the calculation item is moved into that Division. When moving a calculation upward, if moving a calculation would tend to replace a Division name, then the calculation item is moved into the Division above. Click here 120 for the specific information section.
Importing Calculations: Clicking the [Import] button

displays the
109
calculation import system. Click here 123 for the specific information section.
Project Manager
110
8.3.1
Divisions
Divisions are used to organize calculations. The image below has custom Divisions named Beams, Columns, Analysis, etc.
111
Project Manager
112
Clicking the [-] icon to the left of the Division name will compress the Division tree. See image below...note how only the Division names are displayed, but their contents are currently not visible.
Left-clicking on a Division name will display the following pop-up menu:
113
Selecting [Change Division Name] will display the following dialog:
Project Manager
114
8.3.2
Adding, Deleting, Copying

The four buttons shown below are used to manipulate the calculations and Divisions in your current Project File:
Add: Clicking [Add] displays the dialog below, where you can select the type of item to add to your Project File. The window contains two categories of items: Calculations and External Items.
The available Calculations are listed in the top portion of the dialog (and there will be more as the product matures). These are ENERCALC-created structural engineering calculations that you can use. The lower portion of the dialog lists the available External Items that can be created externally from the ENERCALC software package and then inserted into an ENERCALC Project File. These item types are:
115
Microsoft WORD Document: You can include a Microsoft Word document as an item in your Project File. Click here 585 to go to the specific section. Microsoft EXCEL Spreadsheet: You can include a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet as an item in your Project File. Click here 589 to go to the specific section. Adobe Acrobat PDF File: You can include a PDF file as an item in your Project File. Click here 593 to go to the specific section. Scanned Document: You can set up your scanner and scan documents or images to include as an item in your Project File. Click here 597 to go to the specific section.
Copy: For the currently highlighted item in the calculation list, clicking [Copy] creates a new calculation of the same type using all of the information in the current calculation to make the new calculation. The copy is added to the list and is automatically opened for editing. Edit: For the currently highlighted item in the calculation list, clicking [Edit] opens the calculation for editing. Delete: Deletes the item that is currently highlighted in the calculation list. You are prompted to confirm before the deletion is made.
Project Manager
116
8.3.3
Sorting by Division, Type & Material

Select the "Division", "Material", or "Type" tab to sort the calculation list based on these three primary organizational hierarchies.
Division: Organizes the calculation list by the Divisions you created, and sorts the calculations within each Division in the order that you established. See below.
117
Project Manager
118
Material: Organizes the calculation list by the materials to which they refer, and sorts the calculations within each material in the order that you established. See below.
Type: Organizes the calculation list by calculation type, and sorts the calculations within each type in the order that you established. See below.
119
Project Manager
120
8.3.4
Changing Calculation Order

The two buttons shown at the bottom of the calculation list (see image below) are used to move the currently highlighted calculation or Division up or down in the list.
In the images below, note the button that is used to move the item upward in the list:
>
>
121
Now we will show that moving the last item in a Division downward will move the item to the top of the next Division. Notice how the Wood Column calculation moves from the bottom of Floor Framing to the top of Analysis.
>
>
Project Manager
122
123
8.3.5
Importing Calculations
Clicking the button will change the Project Manager screen to appear as shown in the following image. Please see the descriptions following the numbered keynotes. The order of the notes follows the order of usage.
(1) Specify the source ENERCALC Project File from which you will import calculations into the current (destination) Project File. Clicking the [Select Source File] icon will display a standard Windows File Open dialog:
Project Manager
124
Clicking the [Use File Pick List] icon will open a window that lists all the ENERCALC Project Files contained in the last few folders you have accessed:
(2) After identifying the source Project File, area (2) will show the calculations in that source file in a tree-structure list. (3) Click on the desired calculation in the source file to select it. It will become highlighted.
125
(4) Click in the current (destination) Project File to highlight a line where the calculation should be imported. (The only restriction is that calculations cannot be imported into the GENERAL Division or the LOADS & FORCES Division, so be sure to select a location other than those two Divisions or any of their contents.) (5) Click the [Copy Calc Into Project at Highlight] button. Notice in the image below the [Concrete Beam] calculation is now highlighted in green in the current (destination) file to indicate the location where it will be inserted.
Project Manager
126
127
Note: If you made a mistake and want to cancel the selection, just highlight the calculation in green on the left and click the [Remove Added Calc] button (6).
(7) To finish the import process click the
button.
(8) To completely cancel the import click the
button.
Project Manager
128
8.4
Project Printing
The Project Printing system allows you to print a complete project full of reports in one simple process. You can review all the reports in your project and then select which reports to print. To open the Project Printing system, click the button shown bubbled in the screen capture below:
The screen will change to display the Project Printing Manager window. On the left will be listed all of the calculations and external items in the Project File. The items in the GENERAL Division are placed at the top and the items in the other Divisions are placed on the bottom. When you highlight an item the full report appears on the right side of the screen. See the numbered keynotes on the image below as we describe how to use the various controls on the screen. The information is given in order of typical usage.
129
(1) List of project items for which reports are available : This area is similar to the item list in the Project Manager. All available report items are listed here. Simply click an item and the report for that item will be displayed in area (4). Please REMEMBER that the reports shown were created when you clicked [Save Only] or [Save & Exit] in the specific calculation. Note: If your software is licensed and activated, and if you see Evaluation Version watermarks on any reports, use the [Regenerate] button (6) to have all the reports regenerated WITHOUT the watermark.
(2) Print / No-print check mark: This column contains a check mark to denote whether that particular report item is scheduled for printing.
or an X
(3) Clear All / Select All / Invert Selection buttons: These three buttons perform bulk changes to the print/no-print status of all items in the project.
Clears the print tags on all reports, so none will be printed. A displayed to the left of all reports after clicking this button.
is
Project Manager
130
Selects the print tags on all reports, so all will be printed. A displayed to the left of all reports after clicking this button.
is
Inverts the print/no-print tags on all reports. (4) Report Preview area: The complete preview of the report is shown in this area for the report item highlighted in the list. (5) Report page selection: When the highlighted item is a multi-page report, this box selects the page to view. (6) Regenerate Reports: Click here
77
to jump to specific explanation.
(7) Print selected reports to printer: Displays the Windows standard Print dialog box and begins printing all selected project items. (8) Create single PDF file for selected reports: Displays a Windows Open File dialog box to request a filename for a PDF file and then creates a PDF of all selected project items.
Click [Close] to dismiss the Project Printing Manager.
Part
IX
Sample Session
132
Sample Session
133
9.1
Getting Started
Getting Started This section will guide you through a session of preparing and printing a calculation. We will use the General Timber Beam calculation because it contains all the features available in the Structural Engineering Library. This sample session will cover these topics. If you are viewing this in the HTML help system, just click on an item to jump right to the section. Starting the Program 134 Project Assistant 135 Creating a Project File 137 Entering Project Information 139 Setting up your Title Block 141 Adding a Calculation 143 Viewing the Calculation Screen 146 Entering Data 147 Selecting Sections and Materials from Built-in Databases 159 Displaying a Sketch 164 Displaying Diagrams 165 Automatic Member Section Selection 167 Printing a Calculation 170 Saving a Calculation 173 Editing a Division Name and Adding a New Division 174 Adding Another Calculation 178 Creating a Technical Support Question 182 Closing a Project File 187
Sample Session
134
9.2
Starting the Program

First....let's start the program To start the Structural Engineering Library, navigate to the ENERCALC program group from the Start menu. Click the Windows [Start] button and move upward to highlight the Programs (or All Programs) item. Locate the ENERCALC program group and highlight it. You will see several selections. Move the cursor to highlight Structural Library Version 6 and release the mouse button.
The Structural Engineering Library will now open, and you will be viewing the Project Assistant as described below.
135
9.3
Project Assistant
The Project Assistant This dialog gives you the ability to instantly choose how you wish to begin your work session. All of these options can also be easily chosen from the main menu, and the Project Assistant can also be reopened from the main menu after the program has already started.
For this Sample Session we want to create a new Project File, so the next step will be to click the [Create Project File] button. The next window to be displayed (see below) will allow you to define the file name and select the drive & directory where the file should be placed.
Sample Session
136
We will use the filename Sample Session and place it in a folder named ENERCALC Project Files that we created specifically to hold Project Files. Note: You could place the file in other directories, but keep in mind that Microsoft is now recommending specific locations for saving user-generated files with the newer operating systems, and the default ENERCALC data folder conforms to these new best-practice recommendations. The important thing to recognize is that an ENERCALC Project File can hold thousands of calculations, so it is likely that there will only need to be a single ENERCALC Project File for each design project in the office.
137
9.4
Creating a Project File

Creating a Project File Here's the Create NEW Project File dialog box with the new filename entered. NO FILE EXTENSION is necessary....the program will append it. When the dialog appears as it does below, just click [Save] and the file will be created.
When a new Project File is created, the new Project File is immediately opened and displayed in the Project Manager window. You can see in the screen image below that the new Project File looks rather plain and simple.
Sample Session
138
Notice that the ONLY items appearing in the calculation list are the words "GENERAL", "LOADS & FORCES" and "Calculations". These items are called Divisions. You can create as many Divisions as you like. They serve as a way to organize your calculations into logical groups for your convenience . All newly created Project Files will contain these three Divisions by default. The "GENERAL" Division and the "LOADS & FORCES" Division cannot be renamed or deleted, and they serve specific purposes, which we will see shortly. But the "Calculation" Division is just created for convenience. It can be renamed, deleted, copied, etc. Before we add any calculations to this Project File, the next step will be to enter some general information about the project itself.
139
9.5
Entering Project Information

Entering Project Information Click the [+] icon to the left of the GENERAL Division in the Project Manager to expand its contents, and then double-click the top item named Project Information.
For this sample session you can fill in anything you like, just to see how the Project Information fields can be used. Then click the [Save & Exit] button and click [OK] in the Reminder dialog. The purpose of the Reminder dialog is to alert us to the fact that some data just changed in the title block. Under normal conditions, the Structural Engineering Library regenerates the report for a single calculation at a time, and it does that when the Save command is issued while a calculation is open. This makes for a very efficient use of time by generating reports only on an as-needed basis. However, because we just made a change to title block data, it is likely that we want all reports regenerated and brought up to date at this time. This Reminder dialog guides us to the command in the main menu that manually forces all reports to be immediately regenerated. NOTE: This Project Information is printed in the upper-right corner of your printouts. All Structural Engineering Library printouts have a Title Block area that contains your company's information in the upper-left corner and the Project Information in the upper1983-2011 ENERCALC, INC
Sample Session
140
right corner. The above project information (and the title block information described in the next section) will look like this on the printouts:
141
9.6
Setting up your Title Block

Setting up your Title Block Before continuing on to add some calculations to the project, we'll demonstrate where to enter company information to be included on ALL calculations produced within the Structural Engineering Library. Click Settings > Printing & Title Block from the main menu.
The Printing & Title Block tab of the Program Settings dialog will be displayed. Here you can use six lines to customize the printout with your own company information. This information will be printed in the upper-left corner of ALL printouts (see sample previously).
Sample Session
142
The Logo File area of this dialog also offers the option to identify a graphic file of your company's logo and specify that it be printed as part of the Title Block. Clicking the button lets you use a file selection dialog to select a Windows Bitmap (BMP), GIF, JPG, or WMF file. At this time, please enter some information in all six lines so you can see it printed later in this sample session. Click the [Close] button when finished, and then click the [OK] button in the Reminder dialog.
143
9.7
Adding a Calculation
Adding a Calculation To add a calculation in the Project Manager, first highlight the location where you would like the new calculation to be inserted. At present we have no calculations in the Division named "Calculations", so we will click on "Calculations" to highlight it as shown below:
Next, click the [Add]
button.
The next dialog will allow you to select exactly which calculation type you wish to add:
Sample Session
144
For this sample session we will use the Wood Beam module, so click the [Wood Beam] button as shown below.
145
A Wood Beam calculation will be added in the Project Manager, and it will automatically be opened for editing. The screen will reconfigure itself to display the graphical user interface that is specific to the Wood Beam module.
Sample Session
146
9.8
Viewing the Calculation Screen

Viewing the Calculation Screen The screen should now appear as shown below. Please observe the following areas of the screen....they are typical of ALL calculations in the Structural Engineering Library.
The data entry tabs on the top half of the screen are where you enter your input values. The Results & Graphics tabs on the bottom half of the screen are where you review the calculated values, sketches, and graphs that result from calculations based on your input values. This screen layout is consistent throughout the majority of the Structural Engineering Library calculation modules. This enables you to display the tab of interest on the bottom and see how changes to input data on the top affect it.
147
9.9
Entering Data
Entering Data Below is a diagram for a wood roof beam we wish to design.
The following steps will guide you through the process of setting the span lengths and entering the loads as shown. (In a subsequent step we will select the member section size and reference design values from the internal databases.) The top portion of the screen should currently look like this:
The first thing we will do is add the left cantilever. To do this, click the [+/-] icon at the left end of the beam as shown bubbled below:
This opens the dialog named Select Add or Delete. It is currently set up to allow us to add a new beam span, which is exactly what we want to do. There are some additional settings offered at the bottom of the dialog in the form of checkboxes. We don't need to worry about these at this point, but it's good to know that they are available, because they can offer some time-saving conveniences in certain modeling situations. See the image of the Select Add or Delete dialog shown below:
Sample Session
148
For our purposes, all we need to do is click the [OK] button. This inserts a new beam span to the left of the original beam as shown below:
At this point, don't be concerned about the fact that the new span is not a cantilever and that it is not the intended length. We'll correct both of those items in just a moment. For now, let's repeat a similar process to add a new beam span on the right. First click the [ +/-] icon that appears above the right-most support. The following dialog appears:
149
This is very similar to the Select Add or Delete dialog we saw before, except that it now has an extra option to delete the span that is to the left of the support. Although we don't want to do this, it's good to know that this is the way that you would delete a span if necessary. What we want to do is add a new beam span, and that is the option that is currently selected (highlighted in yellow), so we can just click the [OK] button. The screen should now display a 3-span continuous beam as shown below:
Now that we have three spans to work with, let's modify the support conditions to create the cantilevered spans at the left and the right. To do this, click on the left-most support icon shown bubbled below:
Sample Session
150
This will open the following pop-up menu that offers many options for defining the support condition at that location:
Click the Free End option to remove all restraint from the left end, creating a cantilever. Repeat the same process at the right-most support, but leave the remaining two supports as they are currently configured. (They represent pinned conditions that prevent translation in all directions but offer no moment restraint.) The result will be the doublecantilevered beam as shown below:
Now that the support conditions have been established correctly, we can wrap up this exercise by modifying the span lengths to match the problem definition. Start by clicking the Beam Span Data tab shown bubbled below:
The screen layout will change to display the Beam Span Data tab as shown below:
Now, we just need to adjust the span lengths for each of the three spans. First, note that the graphical depiction of the beam helps us to make the association
151
between the three individual spans and the span numbers. Click any of the three span number buttons in the Select Span area and notice that a corresponding span becomes highlighted in the large graphic at the top of the view. Using this method, we can confirm that the spans are logically ordered from number one on the left to number three on the right. (Note that you can also click the highlighted rectangles shown above each beam span, and they act in exactly the same way that the numbered buttons do.) So to finish things off, click the button for span [1] and verify that the left span becomes highlighted. According to the problem statement, this span is supposed to be 7'-3", so you can highlight the value that is presently displayed in the Span Length field, manually edit it to say 7.25, and then press the [Tab] key to enter that value. The display will update to show the proper span length for the left beam span as shown below:
Repeat the same process to set the Span Length for the middle span to 24'-0" and to set the Span Length for the right span to 9'-6", at which time the display should appear as shown below:
The next step will be to enter the loads on the beam. Let's begin by entering the concentrated load at the free end of the left beam span. Click the Span Loads tab to display the following screen:
Sample Session
152
This screen contains tools to apply loads to a selected span at a time. (Shortly, we will see a convenience tool that will allow us to apply loads to ALL spans of a beam at one time.) Since we want to start by entering the concentrated load at the free end of the left beam span, click the [1] button in the Select Span area to put the focus on Span 1. The blue highlighted band in the table now represents the first load on Span 1. But it currently indicates Load Type = None, because we have not defined the load yet. Click the button indicated in the screen capture below to identify the load as being a concentrated load:
This will reconfigure the screen with the appropriate input fields to fully define the magnitude, direction, and location of the concentrated load as shown below:
153
The Load Source input field provides a location where you can add some descriptive text for your own use to identify this particular load item. The use of this field is optional, so for this sample session we will leave it blank. Select the checkbox for the Auto add beam weight option. This will trigger the program to determine the self weight of the beam that we eventually choose, and apply it as dead load when the analysis is performed. Select the checkbox for the Auto Unbalanced Live load Placement option. This will initiate the generation of additional loading conditions to ensure that all possible permutations of live load placement are properly examined. Note that selecting this option can lead to longer analysis times because of the number of different conditions that must be analyzed. However, with the double-cantilevered beam configuration, it would be important for us to have the module examine all of these potential loading permutations. When defining the magnitude of the concentrated load, note that the module is set up to receive this kind of load in units of kips, and notice that it has input fields for the common load cases, such as Dead, Live, Snow, etc. Click in the input field for Dead, enter a magnitude of 3.03, and then press the [Tab] key. This enters the Dead load magnitude and moves the cursor to the next input field. Note: For convenience this module is configured such that loads with positive magnitudes are assumed to act downward, since the majority of the load items are typically gravity loads of some sort. The cursor is currently in the Lr input field, which represents Roof Live load. We don't need to enter any magnitude for Roof Live, so press the [Tab] key once again to place the cursor on the Live load input field. Enter a magnitude of 2.824, and then press the [Tab] key. The final step in specifying this concentrated load is to identify its position using the Location input field. Always specify the distance from the left end of this span to the position of the concentrated load. In this case, the correct value is zero, which also
Sample Session
154
happens to be the default value for the Location field, so the Location field can be left as-is. The screen should now appear as shown below:
The next step will be to define the other concentrated load, which occurs at the free end of the cantilever on the right end of the beam, by following a very similar process. Click the [3] button in the Select Span area to put the focus on Span 3.
Click the
button to identify the load as being a concentrated load.
The magnitudes of this load are the same as those used at the opposite end of the beam, so click in the input field for Dead, enter a magnitude of 3.03, and then press the [Tab] key twice. In the Live load input field enter a magnitude of 2.824, and then press the [Tab] key. This concentrated load is to be positioned at the extreme right end of this span, so click in the Location input field, enter a distance of 9.5 (9'-6" from the support at the left end of Span 3), and then press the [Tab] key. The screen should now appear as shown below:
155
The next step in defining loads is to apply the uniformly distributed load across all three spans. This could be done by using the Uniformly Distributed Loading Type here on the Span Loads tab. But this would require some repetition, because the Span Loads tab is specifically set up to facilitate the application of loads to one span at a time. To apply this load in a more efficient manner, click the Loads All Spans tab shown bubbled below:
The screen will reconfigure itself to display different tools for applying various types of loads to all spans of the beam. The one that is most appropriate for our application is the one shown bubbled below:
Click that tool and note that the screen displays input fields for Tributary Width and load magnitudes for the various Load Cases as shown below:
Sample Session
156
Note: When using this tool, you can either leave the Tributary Width input field at its default value of 1.0, and then enter the magnitudes for the various load cases in units of kips per foot, or you can specify a Tributary Width magnitude other than 1.0 foot, and then enter the magnitudes for the various load cases in units of kips per square foot, which will be multiplied by the Tributary Width to determine the magnitude of the effective line load in units of kips per foot. For the purposes of our exercise, we will leave the Tributary Width input field at its default value of 1.0. Click in the Dead load input field, enter a magnitude of 0.036, and press the [Tab] key twice. In the Live load input field, enter a magnitude of 0.24, and press the [Tab] key once more. The last item to take care of is to observe the load combinations that will be used for design. Click the Load Combinations tab shown bubbled below:
This will display the Load Combinations screen. On this screen, the first step is to make sure that we are referencing the correct set of load combinations. To do this, click the "Delta" (or "Change") icon shown below bubbled below:
157
This will open a pop-up menu offering choices of load combination templates based on various codes, similar to the one shown below:
Choose the option named 2009 IBC ASCE 7-05. This will ensure that the load combinations based on IBC 2009 and ASCE 7-05 are loaded into the module. Next, click the button, and confirm by clicking the [Yes] button. This is a very convenient option for wood designs, because it automatically sets the CD value based on the shortest duration load case within each load combination. Note the various values of C that result. D The final step in this section is to ensure that all of the listed load combinations will be used in the analysis and design. To do this, click the button. This will open a pop-up menu offering options for marking and clearing the Run status of all of the load combinations in the list, as shown below:
Sample Session
158
Simply click the [Mark All] option, and all of the load combinations in the list will be marked for use in the analysis and design.
159
9.10
Selecting Sections and Materials from Built-in Databases

Selecting Sections and Materials from Built-in Databases In the previous topic you experienced part of the advantage of using the Structural Engineering Library...simplified data entry. The input screens naturally guide you through all of the necessary items, and you are simply entering data into a form. We still have two critical items to specify.....the stress properties of the wood member to use and the physical size of the beam. First, let's retrieve the reference design values. For this sample we want to use a Douglas Fir glued-laminated beam of type 24F-V8. Click the General Data tab shown bubbled below:
In the Design Values category, click the [Display Wood Material Database] button . The Wood Stress Database will be displayed as shown below:
Sample Session
160
By default the last selection of stress grade is displayed. We want to display ONLY the glued-laminated sections for Douglas Fir. In the Size Classes to Show category, click the [Glued-Laminated] button:
Click the [Contract Trees] Common Names.
button to collapse the display of Wood Species
Click the [+] in front of the DF/DF item to expand the Douglas Fir list:
The result of these choices will be a list of stress grades as shown....
Click the 24F-V8 item as shown, and then click the [Select] button. The stress information area on the General tab will immediately be updated to reflect your selection:
161
Next, let's retrieve the section property data for a 6.75" x 30" glulam beam
Click the Beam Span Data tab Spans] button is clicked as shown below:
and make sure that the [Use for All
Then click the [Section Database] button shown bubbled below:
The Wood Section Database will be displayed as shown below:
Sample Session
162
Now click the button in the Glued Laminated category so that only those members are displayed. The result of this choice will be a list of glulam beams. Scroll down through the database and highlight the 6.75" x 30" beam as shown below:
163
Click the button. The beam size information area on the Beam Span Data tab will immediately be updated to reflect your selection:
Sample Session
164
9.11
Displaying a Sketch
Displaying a Sketch We now have a calculation with span lengths, loads, allowable stresses, and a beam size. It's time to review the sketch to confirm that we have entered the critical span and load information correctly. Click the Sketch tab, and the working area of your screen will be replaced with a simple diagrammatic representation of the beam.
165
9.12
Displaying Diagrams
Displaying Diagrams In addition to the Sketch of the beam, we can also display several types of diagrams. Selecting the Diagrams tab will display the Shear/Moment/Deflection diagram as shown below. Of special interest are the checkboxes that control the location of live load for the analysis shown in the graphic. Because this program automatically moves the live load around on the beam to obtain the governing values of shear, moment, and deflection on each span for the final calculation results, there really is no single load case that represents the entire beam analysis. By selecting the live load locations here you can view the detailed shear/moment/ deflection variations produced by each load application. Note: In the previous steps, we turned on the option to have the program automatically handle unbalanced Live load placement. While this is a helpful feature for design, it tends to produce an abundance of results. If you'd like to view shear, moment, and deflection diagrams that are similar to those shown below, click the Span Loads tab and temporarily turn off the option to have the program automatically perform unbalanced Live load placement.
Sample Session
166
167
9.13
Automatic Member Section Selection

Automatic Member Section Selection An additional feature of many of the Structural Engineering Library calculation modules is automatic selection of sizes that satisfy your specified design criteria. Note: If you turned off the option to have the program automatically perform unbalanced Live load placement in the previous topic, please click back to the Span Loads tab now and make sure the option for Auto Unbalanced Live Load Placement is selected once again. Click the Calculations tab at the left edge of the screen as shown bubbled below:
When the screen displays the Calculations environment, click the Summary Results tab as shown bubbled below:
Take a look at the stress and deflection ratios bubbled in the screen capture below:
Sample Session
168
We can see that our 6.75" x 30" size guess may not be an optimum use of the section. It would be interesting to see if we could find a more efficient section. Rather than randomly trying other sizes from the database, we will use the Automatic Design function to select an optimum member size for us. Click the [Design] button on the Beam Span Data tab shown bubbled below:
The Wood Member Design dialog is displayed, and it allows you to set the design criteria:
On the Wood Member Design dialog, click the [Glu-Lam - Western] section type, set the Maximum Stress Ratio to 1.0, and the Minimum Total Deflection Ratio to 180, then click the [Start Design] button. The software will automatically search the built-in Wood Section Database for all sections that satisfy this criteria using the beam span, stress grade, and loading you have specified. In a few moments the following dialog will be displayed:
169
Notice how the listed members can be sorted in different orders based on: Weight, Bending Ratio, Shear Ration, LL Deflection Ratio,Total Deflection Ratio, Depth, etc. This allows you to review the beam sizes that pass your criteria in different ways. Click on the 5.125 x 27 beam and then click the [Select] button. The final design (with Summary Results tab showing) looks like this:
Sample Session
170
9.14
Printing a Calculation
Printing a calculation Okay...congratulations! You've created a Project File, added a calculation, entered data, retrieved database information, performed an automatic design, and viewed some graphics. It's time to print this calculation and take a look at what the software provides for documentation. Please remember that you have previously entered project information, title block information, and of course now you have a valid engineering calculation to print. You have three printing options in the Structural Engineering Library:
The
icon that looks like a printer sends the report report directly to the printer. The icon that looks like a printer with a page symbol displays the print preview in a
window and allows you to review it before sending it to the printer. The Adobe logo creates an Adobe Acrobat PDF file of the report. The Print Preview window looks like this:
icon with the
171
To continue, simply click the [Print] button and the standard Windows print dialog will be displayed. Select your printer and you will receive a printout looking very similar to the one below:
Sample Session
172
173
9.15
Saving a Calculation
Saving a Calculation With as much as we have accomplished in this short period of time, it is very important to remember that we have not yet SAVED this calculation. Everything associated with this calculation is still stored in the computer's RAM. A power outage or severe system lockup would cause a loss of your current calculation. So to save this new calculation to the Project File, click the [Save & Exit] button . The current calculation will be saved and the display will return to the Project Manager. In the image below, you can see that a Wood Beam calculation has been added to the Division named "Calculations":
Congratulations! You calculation is now secure and you have a real Project File with an actual calculation.
Sample Session
174
9.16
Editing a Division Name and Adding a New Division

Editing a Division Name Let's do a little more work here in the current Project File. We will edit the Division named "Calculations", and we will add a new Division. Edit a Division Name To edit a Division name, simply right-click the name and click Change Division Name in the pop-up menu.
In the Enter New Division Name dialog, revise the Division name to "2nd Floor Framing" as shown below:
Click [Save]. You will notice that the Division name has been revised from "Calculations" to "2nd Floor Framing", but it still contains the Wood Beam calculation.
175
Now we will add a NEW Division named "3rd Floor Framing". To do this, click on the
Division named "2nd Floor Framing" and then click the [Add] button . In the Select Item to Insert dialog, click the [Insert Division] button shown bubbled below:
Sample Session
176
Note: There is also an option in the right-click pop-up menu named Add Division. Then enter the name "3rd Floor Framing" and click [Save]. Your Project calculation list should look like this:
177
Sample Session
178
9.17
Adding Another Calculation

Adding Another Calculation in the New Division by using [Copy Calc] Similar to the way we added our first calculation, we will now add another calculation in the 2nd Floor Framing Division by making a copy of the current Wood Beam calculation and then move it into the 3rd Floor Framing Division. First, click on the Wood Beam calculation as shown in the screen capture below:
Then, click the button. This will read all the data from the highlighted calculation, create an entirely new calculation that is an exact copy of the highlighted one, and open the new calculation so it can be edited as necessary. When the Wood Beam calculation module opens, change the Description item to read "3rd Floor Cantilevered Beam" as shown below:
179
Next click the [Save & Exit] button to save this new calculation to the Project File and close the calculation. The Project Manager will appear as follows:
Sample Session
180
The final step is to move this new calculation into the 3rd Floor Framing Division. This is easily done by using these buttons:
While the new calculation is highlighted, click the Move Highlighted Item Down button to move it down to the 3rd Floor Framing Division. The Project Calculation list will appear like this:
181
Sample Session
182
9.18
Creating a Technical Support Question

Creating a Technical Support Question The occasion may arise that you will have a question about the software system. To best serve you, there are certain pieces of information that are essential. Among these are your name, the name of your company, your "KW" user registration number, and the build number of the software you are using. To make it easy for you to give us all this AND state your question, the Structural Engineering Library has a built-in technical support form. It allows you to simply type in your question and either email it directly to our Technical Support Group or print it out to fax to us. By emailing or faxing us your Technical Support questions, we can easily identify you, determine if you are in need of a maintenance release, and easily read your questions. In addition, the email method offers the option of attaching the subject ENERCALC file. To create an email: Click Help > Create Tech Support EMAIL from the main menu. This opens the form shown below, in which you can enter your question and attach your Project File if desired.
183
When finished, click the [Send] button to transfer the completed message (with attachments) to your email program:
Sample Session
184
To create a FAX: Click Help > Create Tech Support FAX from the main menu to use the form shown below to enter your question.
185
When finished, the completed message can be printed for faxing (or it can be sent directly from your computer-based fax software). Here's the printed form, ready for transmission:
Sample Session
186
187
9.19
Closing a Project File

Closing a Project File Well....it's time to close out our worksession. The data is safely saved in the Project File already, so at this point we can close the current Project File by clicking File > Close Project from the main menu:
Part
189
10
Calculation Modules
Calculation Modules
190
10.1
Loads & Forces Division

The LOADS & FORCES Division in the Project Manager is automatically created for you when a new Project File is started.
There is only one LOADS & FORCES Division for each project, and it is always prepopulated with specific load-related calculation items. Their use is optional, but these calculation modules cannot be moved out of the LOADS & FORCES Division, nor can other calculation modules be moved into or added to the LOADS & FORCES Division. In particular, the LOADS & FORCES Division includes modules that assist with the development of snow, wind, seismic, and reduced live load calculations. As the Structural Engineering Library is enhanced, the LOADS & FORCES Division will contain more and more tools to assist with developing your project load calculations.
191
10.1.1 ASCE Seismic Base Shear

Need more? Ask Us a Question
Click Here For Video
This module is a presentation of equivalent lateral force procedure seismic provisions in ASCE 7. The module currently supports calculations based on ASCE 7-05 and ASCE 710. All of the references to ASCE 7 are given on the module screens. Above each screen capture are notes as needed to call attention to entries or explain usage. The module is designed to allow you to work downwards through the tabs on the left side of the screen. ASCE 7 skips all around in its definitions of things to check. This module simplifies the process by properly ordering the items and the necessary decisions to be made in working toward a final seismic base shear value. The program includes a complete national zip code database and USGS databases of seismic ground motion specifically for use with ASCE 7. Using city names or zip codes, you can look up the latitude and longitude of the representative center of the zip code. The seismic ground motion databases consist of "gridded" values for small increments of latitude and longitude. Given the latitude and longitude for the city or zip code of interest, the surrounding grid data points are located and those seismic ground motion values are used to interpolate a value for the latitude and longitude specified. For this reason the values may not match the web-based USGS database values exactly, however the grid point interpolation is proper. General
Calculation Modules
192
Ss, S1: Ground Motion Three options are available to specify the SS and S1 values. Browse City Database Use the Select State drop-down list box to select the State. Then click one of the City First Letter buttons to have all cities (in the database) listed in the scrolling box on the right. Then simply click on the city to select. Some city names have have multiple zip codes.
193
Enter SS and S1 Directly Or, you can enter the SS and S1 values directly.
Enter Latitude & Longitude Directly Or, you have the option to enter the latitude and longitude for the project location. (Note that longitude is degrees WEST, so do not enter negative.)
Calculation Modules
194
Site Class, Site Coefficients and Seismic Design Category Select the appropriate Site Class based on the geotechnical conditions.
Selection of Seismic Force Resisting System Click one of the large boxes at the top of the tab to load the table with specific selections
195
for that general category of Seismic Force Resisting System. Note the checkbox for systems with flexible diaphragms. This may not apply to some building systems...check ASCE for details on the particular system of interest.
Redundancy Factor Depending on the Seismic Design Category determined from the prior selections of Occupancy, Seismic Ground Motion and Building System, the Redundancy Factor per ASCE will be shown here.
Calculation Modules
196
Specification of Building Period All four ASCE 7 options for building period determination are available here.
197
Evaluation of Approximate Building Period
Approximate Period for Steel & Concrete Frames

Calculation Modules
198
Approximate Period for Masonry Structures
Long-Period Transition Period Reference Maps Maps copyright ASCE.
199
Cs: Seismic Response Coefficient Please check ASCE 7 section references for details.
Calculation Modules
200
Vertical Distribution of Base Shear This tab calculates the vertical distribution of seismic forces. Use the [Add] button for each new level. To edit information for a level, highlight the corresponding line and click [ Edit].
201
Diaphragm Forces Using the information entered above (on the prior tab) the force distribution results are shown here.
Calculation Modules
202
Wall Anchorage Forces The calculation of seismic wall anchorage forces has been enhanced and moved to a separate module.
203
Calculation Modules
204
10.1.2 ASCE Seismic Demands on Nonstructural Components

This module is an implementation of the provisions for seismic demands on nonstructural components as per ASCE 7. The module currently supports calculations based on ASCE 7-05 and ASCE 7-10. Input parameters are taken directly from the nomenclature presented in ASCE 7. The ASCE 7-05 version of this calculation produces component design forces using the defined parameters. The ASCE 7-10 version of this calculation produces both component and connection design forces using the defined parameters.
205
10.1.3 ASCE Seismic Wall Anchorage

This module is an implementation of the provisions for design and anchorage of walls to resist seismic forces as per ASCE 7. The module currently supports calculations based on ASCE 7-05 and ASCE 7-10. Input parameters are taken directly from the nomenclature presented in ASCE 7. The ASCE 7-05 version of this calculation produces: Out-of-Plane Force for Structural Wall Design Out-of-Plane Force for Concrete and Masonry Structural Wall Anchorage Design (for all Seismic Design Categories where structural walls connect to rigid diaphragms, and for SDC A and B where walls connect to flexible diaphragms) Out-of-Plane Force for Concrete and Masonry Structural Wall Anchorage Design (for Seismic Design Categories C through F where walls connect to flexible diaphragms) The ASCE 7-10 version of this calculation produces: Out-of-Plane Force for Structural Wall Design Out-of-Plane Wall Anchorage Force The module is configured to allow the definition of up to 20 different wall conditions. The user has the option to decide which (if any) of the calculations will be included in a Project Print.
Calculation Modules
206
207
10.1.4 ASCE Wind Enclosure

This module is an implementation of the provisions for determining the Enclosure Classification for the determination of Wind Loads as per ASCE 7. The module currently supports calculations based on ASCE 7-05 and ASCE 7-10. Input parameters are taken directly from the nomenclature presented in ASCE 7. The calculation sheet is set up to permit up to ten different analyses to be documented within a single Project File. This can be useful when a project includes multiple buildings, or in situations where multiple scenarios are being evaluated. The data collection is presented in such a way as to guide the user through the module in a logical progression. Values of gross area and area of openings are provided for walls on four sides of the building (arbitrarily designated "North", "South", "East", and "West"). Once these values are provided, the module can determine if the structure qualifies as "Open" or not. If the structure is determined to be "Open", then the module will indicate that result and stop there. If the structure does not qualify as an "Open" structure, then input fields for Roof Gross Area and Roof Opening Area will be displayed, and a set of four tabs will appear in the bottom half of the screen. Once the Roof areas are populated, the four tabs thoroughly present the calculations to determine whether the structure qualifies as "Enclosed" or "Partially Enclosed" when each of the four respective walls receives positive external pressure. The results of this determination are useful for project documentation requirements, as well as in guiding the user to read the appropriate results values from other modules within the Structural Engineering Library. Note: The provisions of the ASCE Wind Enclosure module are already incorporated into the ASCE 7-10 Wind Loads module. So it is not necessary to run the standalone version of this module if the ASCE 7-10 Wind Loads module will be used.
Calculation Modules
208
209
10.1.5 ASCE 7-10 Wind Forces, Chapter 27, Part 1

This module is a presentation of the Wind Forces provisions of Chapter 27, Part 1 of ASCE 7-10. Limited documentation is provided here, because all of the references to ASCE 7-10 are given on the module screens.
General The General tab provides an input field for a general description of the project and/or the wind calculations that are being performed.
ASCE 7-10 Wind Force Evaluation
Calculation Modules
210
This tab provides access to a series of Calculation tabs that can be used to store up to ten separate wind calculations. These might be useful for studying different project sites, different architectural concepts, or even evaluating separate buildings in a project. The Description field can be used to distinguish from among the different wind load calculations that might be defined in a single Project File. The Print checkbox specifies whether or not the particular wind load calculation will or will not be included when a Print command is clicked or when a Project Print is performed.
General (sub-tab of the ASCE 7-10 Wind Force Evaluation tab) This tab collects basic data such as Risk Category, Basic Wind Speed, Directionality Factor, Building Dimensions, Exposure Category, Topographic Factor, and information to determine how the building frequency will be determined.
The Risk Category is only for reference in documenting the design. It no longer influences the importance factor, but it does dictate which Wind Speed map to use to determine the Basic Wind Speed.
211
The Exposure Category is dependent upon the upwind characteristics. Therefore, as different building elevations become the windward face of the structure, it is possible that the Exposure Category will change. For this reason, the program allows the Exposure Category to be defined separately for each building face in turn becoming the windward face. The Building Flexibility Selection offers three different options for defining the frequency of the building. The first option declares that the building will be assumed to be rigid (having a frequency greater than or equal to 1 Hz). The second option applies the prescriptive methods in Sections 26.9.2 and 26.9.3 of ASCE 7-10 to approximate the frequency of the building based on construction type/ layout and mean roof height. The third option allows the user to explicitly specify the frequency in the North-South direction and in the East-West direction. Note that if the second option is selected, a new tab named "Frequency" will be introduced between the "Story Data" tab and the "Gust Factor" tab.
Story Data This tab collects the data required to define the vertical locations of the stories with respect to finished grade.
Calculation Modules
212
The development of the story data table is controlled by the three buttons: Add Level, Edit Level, and Delete Level, which perform their respective operations on the table of story data. Clicking Add or Edit opens the Story Information pop-up dialog as shown above. Two items are worthy of note on this dialog. First, the Height to Story is always referenced from grade, so it is looking to collect the height from grade to the story of interest, not the story to story height. Second, the values of eRx and eRy are only used if a building is determined (or defined) to be "Flexible" (< 1 Hz) in a particular direction. So if a building turns out to be "Rigid" in one or both directions, then the values of eRx and eRy are not required in those directions, and the values can be left at zero or a value can be entered, but the program will ignore it.
Frequency (Only displayed if the option is selected on the General tab to "Calculate Frequency") This tab displays the story data that was previously collected, and it requests the Building Construction Type and the values of Li necessary to complete the check to determine if the approximate methods of frequency determination are applicable.
213
If the approximate methods of frequency determination are found to be applicable, this tab reports the approximate frequency. Otherwise, a message will be displayed to indicate that the approximate methods are not applicable, and that the building frequency must be determined another way.
Gust Factor This tab displays the results of the Gust Factor determination for each of the four elevations, in turn, being the face of the building that receives positive external pressure.
Calculation Modules
214
The North, South, East, and West tabs present the calculation and the resulting Gust Factor that will be used in subsequent calculations when the respective building elevation receives positive external pressure. When the building is categorized as "Rigid" in a particular direction, the program offers the checkbox option to force the value of the Gust Factor to 0.85 when the referenced elevation receives positive external pressure. When the building is categorized as "Flexible" in a particular direction, the program requires one more value, which is the damping ratio. This value is collected in an input box on the respective direction tab when appropriate, and the value is incorporated into the Gust Factor to be used when the referenced elevation receives positive external pressure. It is worth noting that many of the parameters used in the calculation of the Gust Factor are dependent upon the Exposure category. Since the Exposure category can vary for each of the four cardinal directions, it is possible that the Gust Factor for use when the North elevation of the building receives positive external pressure may actually be different than the Gust Factor for use when the South elevation of the building receives positive external pressure.
215
Enclosure This tab displays the results of the Enclosure determination for each of the four elevations, in turn, being the face of the building that receives positive external pressure.
The upper half of this tab is dedicated to evaluating the building to determine whether or not it qualifies as an "Open" structure. The module collects the gross areas of each of the four walls along with the areas of opening in each of the four walls. Based on the data provided by the user, the module performs the calculations and checks the criteria to see if the building qualifies as an "Open" structure. If it does, then the module reports that result. If the building does NOT qualify as an "Open" structure" then additional input fields are displayed to collect the gross area of the Roof, and the area of openings in the roof, and the workflow continues to determine whether the building qualifies as "Enclosed" or "Partially Enclosed". This evaluation takes place four times, considering each of the four walls to be the windward wall, in turn. The intermediate calculations are performed and the results are reported on each of the four wall tabs. It is worth noting that a building could potentially be considered "Partially Enclosed" when some of its elevations receive positive external pressure, and "Enclosed" when its other
Calculation Modules
216
elevations receive positive external pressure. It is also worth noting that convenience buttons have been provided on each of the four wall tabs to allow the user to simply declare the building to be "Enclosed" or "Partially Enclosed" when the selected elevation receives positive external pressure. These have been implemented for situations where the evaluation has already been performed and/or the user is already confident in making a decision by judgment. The Enclosure classification is used downstream to select appropriate values of GCpi to use when each of the four elevations becomes the windward wall.
Velocity Pressures This tab displays the results of the Velocity Pressure determination for the various walls when each wall is under leeward, sidewall, and windward wall conditions.
The first row of data reports the values of Kh that are applicable when each of the walls experiences leeward or sidewall pressures.
217
The second row of data reports the resulting values of qh that are applicable when each of the walls experiences leeward or sidewall pressures. Next, a table is presented that reports the values of Kz and the resulting values of qz that are applicable, as a function of height, when each of the walls experiences windward wall pressures.
Pressure Coefficients This tab reports the values of GCpi that are applicable when each of the respective elevations receives positive external pressure. The remainder of this tab is dedicated to collecting the values of Cp or Cn as appropriate for the various surfaces of the building.
Wall values are collected first, and the input fields collect values of Cp that will be used when each of the four walls is a windward wall, a sidewall, or a leeward wall. At the bottom of the tab is a customizable table that is set up to receive many lines of Cp or Cn values pertinent to the roof. A convenience button is provided to display the figures that define the Cp or Cn values for various conditions. A glance at the tables reveals that
Calculation Modules
218
the factors for roofs are frequently dependent upon the wind direction with respect to the ridge, and also dependent upon whether pressures are desired for the windward or leeward surfaces of the roof. So some planning will be required to set this table up to yield the desired results. To make the downstream results most applicable and easy to read, the program has been set up so that a roof pressure value will only be calculated for situations where nonzero values of Cp or Cn have been specified. To put this another way, referring to the table above, there are no values of Cp defined for the North or South elevations for the "Perpendicular: Windward" or "Perpendicular: Leeward" conditions. This is because the ridge is assumed to run in the North-South direction in the hypothetical building being considered. As such, it would not make sense to ask the program to report windward or leeward roof pressures when the wind acts in the north or south directions. So to avoid overpopulating the output with meaningless results, the blank fields will be interpreted by the program as an indication that the corresponding calculation is not required. We will see the benefit of this when we move to the Wind Pressures tab and see how concisely these results are reported. On a related note, it is worth mentioning that the Cp and Cn tables occasionally report values of zero for certain conditions. These are typically provided for interpolation purposes. But if a situation is ever encountered where a value of zero for Cp or Cn is actually required for design purposes, the user is advised to enter a small nonzero value.
Wind Pressures This tab reports the values of wind pressures that occur on the various surfaces of the building when the named elevation receives positive external pressure.
219
Looking at the screen capture above, we see that the North Wall tab is currently selected. Let's work through this tab thoroughly as an example. As indicated in the on-screen note, we interpret all of the results on this tab as being the pressures that occur on the named surface of the building when the North Wall receives positive external wind pressure . So when we are focused on the North Wall tab: The "Windward Wall Pressures" are those that would apply to the North Wall when the North Wall receives positive external pressure. The "Leeward Wall Pressures" are those that would apply to the South Wall when the North Wall receives positive external pressure. The "Sidewall Pressures" are those that would apply to the East and West Walls when the North Wall receives positive external pressure. The "Roof Pressures" are those that would apply to the identified areas measured from the North edge of the roof when the North Wall receives positive external pressure. Just to drive home the proper interpretation of the values reported on the Wind Pressures tab, let's work through the East tab, so we can interpret some windward and leeward roof pressures. Remember that this hypothetical building is assumed to have a North-South oriented ridge. So when we are focused on the East Wall tab:
Calculation Modules
220
The "Windward Wall Pressures" are those that would apply to the East Wall when the East Wall receives positive external pressure. The "Leeward Wall Pressures" are those that would apply to the West Wall when the East Wall receives positive external pressure. The "Sidewall Pressures" are those that would apply to the North and South Walls when the East Wall receives positive external pressure. The "Perp: Windward Roof Pressures" are those that would apply to the windward (East) portion of the roof when the East Wall receives positive external pressure. The "Perp: Leeward Roof Pressures" are those that would apply to the leeward (West) portion of the roof when the East Wall receives positive external pressure. Note that all surfaces report pressures based on both the positive and the negative internal pressure conditions, and the algebraic sign convention follows that of ASCE 7, which is to say that positive values are interpreted to act toward the named surface and negative values act away from the named surface. Work this logic through an example such as a windward wall and see that it all makes sense. The negative internal pressure condition produces higher total pressures toward the windward wall, than the positive internal pressure condition does, because the negative internal pressure works in the same direction as the external pressure on a windward wall. Similar logic can be applied to all other surfaces to demonstrate that the mathematics are proper.
Story Forces This tab reports the values of wind forces tributary to each story in the building.
221
Using the story heights determined on the Story Data tab, the Story Forces tab determines the tributary heights for each floor by assuming a simply-supported wall construction that spans between adjacent floor/roof levels. Wind pressures are applied to the tributary heights and multiplied by the perpendicular dimension of the building to arrive at forces for each story. The option is provided to either display or hide the forces tributary to the lower half of the lowest level. In some construction types, this component of load is delivered to a slab on grade and is not a design consideration for the Main Wind Force Resisting System. The program reports results for each of the four "Cases" as presented by Figure 27.4-8 of ASCE 7-10. Cases 2 and 4 also incorporate a design torsional moment as defined in Figure 27.4-8. In all situations, the program reports the force magnitude. In situations where a torsional moment applies, the program reports the moment arm that is being considered for each component of force, as well as the resulting net moment. The final item in the results on this tab is based on the minimum required wind loads per Section 27.4.7 of ASCE 7-10. That section requires that the wind load to be used in the design of the Main Wind Force Resisting System for an enclosed or partially enclosed building shall not be less than 16 psf multiplied by the wall area of the building (and 8 psf
Calculation Modules
222
multiplied by the roof area of the building projected onto a vertical plane normal to the assumed wind direction). So in this last item in the results list, the program reports story forces assuming 16 psf applied to each wall of the building. As of build 6.12.4.24, the program does not collect enough information to consider the 8 psf on the projection of the roof area, so this additional load may need to be considered with supplemental hand calculations on buildings with other than flat or low-slope roofs.
Base Shears & Torsions This tab reports the summation of the wind story forces and torsions for all levels in the building, for all four "Cases" and for the minimum required wind loads per Section 27.4.7.
Although "Base Shears" are not technically a part of the ASCE 7-10 design procedure for wind loads, the summation of all story forces is often of interest to designers for a variety of reasons. Some designers like to see how the wind "base shear" compares to the seismic base shear. For some designers, the summation of the wind forces is useful in the checking process to get a confidence level that the calculated pressures are reasonable. Whatever the reason, the values are reported on this tab if they are of interest.
223
As with the Story Forces tab, the Base Shears & Torsions tab provides the option to either include or exclude the component of shear and torsion that is tributary to the bottom half of the lowest level.
Print Properties Finally, the complexity of this wind method and its requirements to examine multiple cases and conditions can lead to voluminous output. In recognition of the fact that different designers have different needs, the Print Properties dialog has been provided for this module to enable the output to be tailored to suit.
Calculation Modules
224
10.1.6 ASCE 7-05 Section 6.4, MWFRS:Simplified Forces

This module is a presentation of the Simplified Wind Forces provisions of ASCE 7-05. Limited documentation is provided here, because all of the references to ASCE 7-05 are given on the module screens. General
Applicability Checks Please see ASCE 7-05 references for descriptions. This module performs wind load calculations for the "Simplified" method. ALL boxes must be checked for module to give results on the Analysis Values tab.
225
Analysis Values See ASCE 7-05 sections noted for description of values and other references. The lower portion of this tab gives the resulting calculated wind pressures for the main wind force resisting system and for components & cladding.
Calculation Modules
226
227
10.1.7 IBC 2009 Alternate All-Heights Wind Method

Need more? Ask Us a Question This module is an implementation of the IBC 2009 Alternate All-Heights Wind Method. General, Checklist, & Analysis Values This tab offers a checklist of the criteria that must be satisfied in order to apply the IBC 2009 Alternate All-Heights Wind Method. Once all of the checkboxes are checked, the module will offer input fields for analytical values such as Exposure Category, Mean Roof Height, Topographic Factor parameters, Basic Wind Speed, Occupancy category, and options for the selection of Velocity Pressure Coefficients.
MWFRS - Wall This tab reports design pressures on windward walls, leeward walls, sidewalls and parapets. Pressure values are distinguished for Enclosed and Partially Enclosed structures, and values are reported for the positive internal pressure condition and for the negative internal pressure condition.
Calculation Modules
228
MWFRS - Roof This tab reports design pressures on roof surfaces. Pressure values are distinguished for the conditions of wind perpendicular to the ridge and wind parallel to the ridge. In the case of wind perpendicular to the ridge, pressure values are reported for flat roofs as well as for various slope angles. In all cases, results are presented for Enclosed and for Partially Enclosed structures, and values are reported for the positive internal pressure condition and for the negative internal pressure condition.
229
MWFRS - Non BLDG This tab reports net design pressures on the projection of surfaces of non-building structures.
Calculation Modules
230
C&C - Roof & Overhang This tab reports design pressures on components and cladding within roof surfaces. Results are presented for Enclosed and for Partially Enclosed structures, and values are reported for the positive internal pressure condition and for the negative internal pressure condition.
231
C&C - Wall & Parapet This tab reports design pressures on components and cladding within wall and parapet surfaces. Results are presented for Enclosed and for Partially Enclosed structures, and values are reported for the positive internal pressure condition and for the negative internal pressure condition.
Calculation Modules
232
233
10.1.8 ASCE Snow Loads

Need more? Ask Us a Question This module is an implementation of the ASCE method of determining Flat Roof Snow Load, Sloped Roof Snow Load, and Snow Drifts on Lower Roofs, and Snow Drifts at Roof Obstructions. The module currently supports calculations based on ASCE 7-05 and ASCE 7-10. General Provides a place to enter descriptive text.
Flat Roof Snow Loads Allows up to 10 different flat roof snow loads to be calculated by entering values for all of the parameters in accordance with ASCE 7.
Calculation Modules
234
Sloped Roof Snow Loads Allows up to 10 different sloped roof snow loads. The input form provides the option to refer to a previously defined Flat Roof Snow Load, or to explicitly specify a Flat Roof Snow Load value along with the remaining values for all of the parameters in accordance with ASCE 7.
235
Snow Drifts on Lower Roofs Allows up to 10 different conditions to be evaluated for snow drifts on lower roofs. The input form collects values for all of the necessary parameters to determine the windward and leeward drifts and selects the controlling case in accordance with ASCE 7.
Calculation Modules
236
Snow Drifts at Roof Projections Allows up to 10 different conditions to be evaluated for snow drifts at roof projections. The input form collects values for all of the necessary parameters to determine the windward drift in accordance with ASCE 7.
237
Calculation Modules
238
10.1.9 ASCE Live and Roof Live Load Reduction

This section enables the user to calculate reduced live and roof live loads for various parts of a project. This section is a direct application of ASCE 7-05 Sections 4.8 and 4.9 and ASCE 7-10 Sections 4.7 & 4.8 concerning live and roof live load reductions. We refer the user to those sections of the referenced design standards for specific descriptions of the values used in each column seen below.
239
10.2
Beams
Overview There is one main module for designing Steel, Concrete and Wood beams. There are separate modules for Composite Steel Beams, Steel Beams with Torsional Loads, and one for Masonry Lintels.
This section deals ONLY with typical single- or multi-span Steel, Concrete & Wood beams. The presentation screen is divided into three areas: Beam representation & modification, Data Entry & Calculation Results as illustrated in the screen capture below:
Calculation Modules
240
(1) Beam representation & modification: This area allows you to create and modify the beam layout.
Click on the support icons Free.
to select the type of support fixity: Fixed, Pinned, or
Click on the [+/-] icon
to display a window to add or delete beam spans:
241
Click on the beam representation to change the beam specific data on the Beam Span Data and Span Loads tabs.
Calculation Modules
242
(2) Data Entry: This set of tabs is where you enter all information for the beam. These tabs will show different information according to material type selected. See the specific chapters for the items provided for each material. Click one of the following to jump:
Wood Steel Concrete
Here is a summary of the purpose of each tab: General Data
Beam Material Clicking one of these buttons changes the material type used for the beam. Compression Edge Lateral Bracing These selections control how the module will evaluate the lateral compression edge bracing for the design. When Define Bracing Span-by-Span is selected, the unbraced length is defined on a span-by-span basis on the Beam Span Data tab. When any of the other options are selected, the unbraced length is defined here on the General Data tab, and that definition is applied to all spans of the beam. Analysis Method For wood & steel you can select ASD or LRFD design methods. Concrete design is always ultimate strength (LRFD).
243
Beam Span Data This tab is used to define span length and beam section information:
Select Span These buttons allow you to select which span the values in the data entry area apply to. Span Length This is where you define the length of the currently selected span. Deflection Ratios These are used as the basis for the deflection design check and also as the starting point for automatic member selection. Section Name & Buttons For steel and wood you can enter the standard beam section designation. You can also type in the section name and the module will search the built-in database for a match. If a match is found, the section properties will be loaded from the database and they will appear on the Properties tab. Click the button indicated below to open the section database for rolled steel shapes:
Calculation Modules
244
The database contains an extensive number of standard shapes commonly used in the USA.
Click the button indicated below to display the Steel Member Design dialog:
This provides control over the type of member to be selected and various stress ratio, deflection ratio and size limits to respect during the automatic member selection process.
245
The Quick-List provides a fast way to select a member section from the database. Just select the type of member, scroll through the list and click on your selection.
Compression Edge Lateral Bracing When you have selected Define Bracing Span-by-Span on the General tab you will see the following bracing options on the Beam Span Data tab:
Calculation Modules
246
These selections control how the module will evaluate the lateral compression edge bracing for the beam span selected above. The top row has common selections for fully-braced conditions as well as options to divide the selected span into segments of equal braced length. The Define Spacing option lets you set a starting point and subsequent spacing for the bracing within the selected span:
The Define Locations option lets you set up to three specific bracing locations referenced from the left end of the selected span:
247
Span Loads This tab is used to specify loads FOR THE SELECTED SPAN ONLY (except as noted below) using the tools shown on the following screen capture:
Use the [Add Load], [Copy Load] and [Delete Load] buttons to add, copy, or delete loads on the selected span. Use the Load Type selections to specify the type of load that will be added. This selection affects the currently highlighted item in the table of loads. The data entry areas on the right will change based on the type of load selected. The Auto Add Beam Weight option will calculate the weight of the beam and add it to your applied loads as a uniform dead load on the beam. Note that this option applies to the FULL LENGTH of the beam...it is NOT a setting that can be set on a span-by-span basis. The Auto Unbalanced Live Load Placement option is a VERY powerful selection. When you have two or more beam spans, you can select this item and the module will automatically generate load combinations for all possible permutations of patterned live
Calculation Modules
248
load being placed on alternate spans. For instance, on a two-span beam, it would create conditions that place live load on both spans, live load on the left span only and live load on the right span only. That is a total of three permutations of live load, and it will do this for ALL of the load combinations that are selected to run. NOTE: This can significantly increase recalculation time needed for beams with many spans. Load classifications are: D: Dead, Lr: Roof Live, L: Live, S: Snow, W: Wind, E: Earthquake, H: Earth Pressure
Loads All Spans This tab offers tools that are used to specify loads ON ALL SPANS as shown in the screen capture below:
Click the load type button on the left and the appropriate load entry items will appear to allow you to define the magnitude, location and extent of the load. With all load items set to [None], the tab will be almost entirely blank. Start Dist and End Dist defines the application distance from the FAR LEFT end of the beam. For a beam with two 20' spans where you want to apply a uniform load 5' in from each end use Start Dist = 5.00 and End Dist = 35.00. The third item allows you to define repeating point loads or moments. You define the position of the first load and the spacing increment thereafter. The last item allows you to define repeating loads on EACH span. Load specification is for the load in EACH span. For example, consider a two-span beam where the first span is 25' and the second span is 45'. Selecting [1/3 Points] will place loads at 8.33', 16.66' from the left support of the first span and at 15' and 30' from the left support of the second span. The "Specify" option allows you to provide a unique spacing measured from the left end of each span. Although this tab is not typically used for single-span beams, the tools are perfectly applicable to single-span beams.
249
Load Combinations This tab is used to specify the load combinations that will be run for the analysis of this beam, as shown in the screen capture below:
The button is used to retrieve load combinations sets from the Load Combination database.
81
The lock symbol is used to enable editing of the load combination values. Click on the lock symbol, and the multipliers for the load types will change to data entry items. After you change an item's value and press [Tab], you will see the Load Combination description at the left end of the line change to reflect your entered values. [Use Add'l...] button, when clicked, displays a data entry item where you can specify the magnitude of SDS to use as an additional internal factor in the load combinations. [Auto Reverse Wind Factors] and [Auto Reverse Seismic Factors] buttons trigger the module to create additional load combinations with the "W" and "E" factors set to negative values. This has the effect of reversing the direction of application of the wind and seismic loads that have been applied to the member.
(3) Calculation Result: This set of tabs provides detailed results for the current calculation.
Calculation Modules
250
The vertical tabs on the left edge of the screen allow you to select the three major areas available for review: Calculations provides several tabs that let you review the numeric detail of the calculation. The left-most tab is always the Summary where the concise design is given.
See the individual sections for each material type for specific discussions of these result sections. Sketch provides a scale illustration of the item you are designing, including an indication of support conditions and applied load magnitudes.
Diagram provides a moment, shear, or deflection diagram for the item you are designing.
251
Calculation Modules
252
10.2.1 Multiple Simple Beam

Need more? Ask Us a Question This module is specifically designed to provide rapid analysis and design of simple beams. For complex, multi-span beams please use the other beam modules for wood, steel and concrete beams. This module has an added section above the beam representation that allows you to add and select up to 12 beams to design. This can be seen in the screen capture below:
Looking at the screen capture above you can see: (1) The button in yellow with green lines above and below represents the currently selected beam for which data is displayed. (2) The button labeled [Bm 2] represents the second beam that was defined. Clicking on that button will save all of the data for [Bm 1] and display all the data for [Bm 2]. (3) [Add] is used to add another beam to this calculation. When two beams have already been defined, clicking [Add] will add a button labeled [Bm 3]. (4) [Delete Bm X] is used to delete the noted beam. It will delete the beam that is currently selected. Directly below the band of beam selection buttons is the graphic that shows the basic layout of the currently selected beam. See below for a more detailed description.
253
Note: In this module, the beam span length is always specified on the beam layout graphic.
Beam Layout Graphic This area shows a graphic representation of the selected beam. There are several variations of beams that you can specify using the [Add Cant] buttons and also by clicking on the end support graphics. Here is a basic simple span beam:
Clicking on the right [Add Cant] button in the image above adds a single cantilever at the right support as shown below:
Clicking on the left support icon in the image above displays a selection box so you can select a fixed end. Doing this sets the left support to fixed as shown below:
Clicking on the left [Add Cant] button in the image above adds a single cantilever at the left support, resulting in the double cantilever as shown below:
Note that adding the cantilever on the left also had the effect of automatically revising the left support back to a pinned condition.
General Data Tab This tab is where you select the beam material, allowable stresses, beam size, and set the beam bracing layout. For steel and wood you can select ASD or LRFD design methods. For concrete, only strength design is available.
Calculation Modules
254
Steel Specific Tab Items Design Values: This area enables you to enter the yield strength and elastic modulus of the steel. The paper-with-hand icon gives you access to the available AISC steel stress grades. Quick-List Tab: This tab provides quick access to the built-in 13th Edition AISC steel section list. Clicking a section name like [W] or [HP] in the Select AISC Type category will display all the steel sections of that type in the list to the right.
Properties Tab: This tab provides a [View Section Properties] button that when clicked displays all of the design values for the AISC section you have selected.
Bracing Tab: This tab allows you to select how your beam is braced against lateraltorsional buckling.
255
The first line offers the most basic options.....fully unbraced or fully braced. The next line offers uniform brace spacing options. The last two buttons offer the ability to specify brace spacings from a starting point or enable you to specify selected brace points, as shown below:
Calculation Modules
256
Wood Specific Tab Items Design Values: This area enables you to specify the design values for the wood species & grade you want to use. Click the allowable stresses database. button to access the built-in NDS
Quick-List Tab: This tab provides quick access to the database of wood sections. Clicking a section type button like [Sawn-General] or [TJ:Microllam] in the Select Type category will display all the sections of that type in the list to the right.
Properties Tab: This tab provides the values for the wood section you have chosen. You can enter different numbers here to modify the section.
257
Bracing Tab: See information provided above in the Steel section for a summary of bracing options.
Concrete Specific Tab Items Design Values: This area enables you to enter concrete and reinforcing strengths for the beam. In addition you can specify the stirrup size and Phi values.
Span Data When a concrete beam is chosen, a new tab named Span Data will be added to the user interface (see below). This tab is where you specify the beam cross section and reinforcing. This tab will only be shown when the material is set to concrete.
Calculation Modules
258
Beam Shape: You can select between 4 beam shapes:
259
On the right side of the tab you can specify up to 6 bars set (quantity, size, vertical location and start/stop endpoints). Each bar set is referenced on the sketch with a color shown as a dot to the left of the set description. The column highlighted in light blue titled "Dist of bar center....from...." is how you set the vertical position of the bars set in the beam. When you look at the top one you can read it as "The top bar set is 3 inches from the bottom of the beam". Note that the module will know whether the bars are in tension or compression and handle the calculations properly. The item named Bar Position This Span defines the starting and ending location of the bar's ends with respect to this span's left support.
Calculation Modules
260
The data in the screen capture below shows that bar set #1 runs from the left end (0.0 ft) to 10.0 ft from the left support. Using these starting and ending locations you can fine tune the bar layout and end cutoffs.
Results Tabs
261
And for concrete beams these two additional sub-tabs are also visible:
Calculation Modules
262
Sketch
Diagrams
263
10.2.2 Wood Beam

In this section, for each input tab we will review only the items that are unique to the WOOD material type. For general information on the typical data input for all beams see the Beams 239 topic. This module offers complete design of single and multi-span wood members. Among its capabilities are: Single or multi-span beams. End fixity can be pinned, fixed, free or a combination thereof. Analysis is according to 2005 NDS. ASD or LRFD design methods can be selected. Values of KF and phi are automatically determined and applied for the LRFD method. A complete wood section database is provided. This includes sawn, gluedlaminated and selected manufactured sections. A complete wood species database is provided. All values are per 2005 NDS. Unbraced compression edge lengths can be specified in a variety of ways. Automatic member selection is provided. You can specify values for CM, Ct , Cf u and Cr. CF or CV is automatically provided. In the case of CF , the value is also based on species stress grade. General Data
Beam Material Clicking one of these buttons changes the material type used for the beam. Design Method For wood & steel you can select ASD or LRFD design methods. Concrete design always uses ultimate strength design (LRFD).
Calculation Modules
264
Design Values This section is used to specify the type of wood that will be used. Use the button to access the standard wood stress database and select a material. These values can be edited right on the screen. HOWEVER there are other pieces of information, such as size factors for certain sizes of members, that are stored separately.
Beam Span Data This tab is used to define span length and section information for the beam:
265
The button shown bubbled in the screen capture below is used to display the Wood Section Database.
Calculation Modules
266
The Wood Section Database contains an extensive number of solid-sawn members, glulam members, and manufactured members commonly used in the USA.
The button shown bubbled in the screen capture below is used to display the Wood Member Design dialog.
267
The Wood Member Design dialog allows you to choose the type of member to be selected and to specify limits on the permissible stress ratio, deflection ratio and selected member size.
Note: The factor named Maximum Stress Ratio does not act as a multiplier on the specified deflection ratios. Span Loads No differences from other materials. Loads All Spans No differences from other materials. Load Combinations For wood members you will see entries for load duration factors. When ASD is used, the
Calculation Modules
268
Load Duration Factor is referred to as CD. When LRFD is used, the Load Duration Factor is referred to as . Note that CD and actually appear on the button at the top of the column of values. When
that button is clicked, the program will automatically determine the proper value for CD or according to the NDS based on the shortest duration load type included in each of the load combinations.
Results Tabs: This set of tabs provides detailed results for the current calculation. The vertical tabs on the left edge of the screen allow you to select the three major areas available for review: Calculations, Sketch, and Diagram. The Calculations tab offers the following results options:
269
Summary Results provides details for shear, moment and deflection for the governing load combinations.
Max. Combinations provides detailed results for each beam segment for each load combination. The leftmost column lists the load combinations and the unbraced length being considered. These results are a consolidation of the highly detailed incremental results presented on the M-V-D Summary tab.
M-V-D Summary- Stresses shows highly detailed moment and shear information for each beam and for each load combination. For multi-span beams using Automatic Unbalanced Live Load Placement there may be thousands of lines of results.
M-V-D Summary - Deflections shows highly detailed deflection results for all load combinations.
Calculation Modules
270
Support Reactions shows reactions for each support for each load condition.
The Sketch tab provides a graphic representation of the beam currently being designed:
The Diagram tab offers the ability to view shear, moment, and deflection diagrams for selected load combinations:
REPORTS
271
Below is a typical Wood Beam printed report:
Calculation Modules
272
273
Calculation Modules
274
10.2.3 Steel Beam

In this section, for each input tab we will review only the items that are unique to the STEEL material type. For general information on the typical data input for all beams see the Beams 239 topic. This module offers complete design of single and multi-span steel members. Among its capabilities are: Single or multi-span beams. End fixity can be pinned, fixed, free or a combination. Steel member analysis and design are according to AISC 360-05. ASD or LRFD design methods can be selected. A complete steel section database is provided. Unbraced compression edge lengths can be specified in a variety of ways. Automatic member selection is provided. General Data When steel is used, this tab includes input fields to set the values for yield stress and elastic modulus, as well as an option to set the Cb factor equal to 1, as shown in the screen capture below:
If Cb is not forced to 1, the program automatically calculates Cb based on the moment and direction of curvature at various locations along the beam.
For convenience the module includes a built-in steel database. Click the button to the right of the Fy entry and you will see the following table, which offers a number of commonly used steel grades:
275
Beam Span Data When steel is selected, the beam size selection is specifically for steel. You can select a section in 4 ways: 1 - Simply type the AISC name into the Steel Section Name field and press [Tab]. 2 - Click the database access button and select from the built-in AISC section database. 3 - Click the [Design] button to have the module evaluate steel sections from the database according to your criteria. 4 - Select a steel section from the Quick-List tab as shown below:
Calculation Modules
276
Span Loads No differences from other materials. Loads All Spans No differences from other materials. Load Combinations No differences from other materials. Results Tab This set of tabs provides detailed results for the current calculation. The vertical tabs on the left edge of the screen allow you to select the three major areas available for review: Calculations, Sketch, and Diagram. The Calculations tab offers the following results options: Summary Results provides details for shear, moment and deflection for the governing load combinations.
Max. Combinations provides detailed results for each beam segment for each load combination. The leftmost column lists the load combinations and the unbraced length being considered. These results are a consolidation of the highly detailed incremental results on the MV-D Summary tab.
277
M-V-D Summary- Stresses shows highly detailed moment and shear information for each beam and for each load combination. For multi-span beams using Automatic Unbalanced Live Load Placement there may be thousands of lines of results.
M-V-D Summary - Deflections shows highly detailed deflection results for all load combinations.
Calculation Modules
278
279
10.2.4 Concrete Beam

General Data The concrete beam module handles single and multiple span beams using ONE cross section shape. That shape can have up to six groups of reinforcing per span. This module also has a beam on elastic foundation option for single span beams. In the screen capture below you can see the two large selection boxes. Selecting Single Span Beam on Elastic Foundation will remove the ability to select end support conditions, and it will provide an entry for the Modulus of Subgrade Reaction of the supporting soil. On the right side of this tab are all the required rebar, concrete strength and elastic modulus entries, shear stirrup data, strength reduction factors and deflection criteria to check. NOTE: It is important to know how this module operates with regard to beam stiffness along the span, and how this affects multi-span beams. This module divides each span into a series of segments. The effective moment of inertia for each segment (for each load combination) is calculated using the actual unfactored moment on that segment. Thus the module creates a proper variable stiffness model of the beam based on actual moments. For multiple span beams, this will affect the relative stiffness of each beam span. Thus the moment distribution across multiple spans will be properly performed. This will affect factored load moments and shears and service load level deflections and reactions.
Beam Span Data This tab has some pieces of input that are constant for all spans and some that can vary on a span-by-span basis. The cross section shape and dimensions are the same for all spans. When you click on a span (for multi-span beams) in the topmost section of the window,
Calculation Modules
280
the span length and rebar layout will change to show the arrangement that is specific to that span. On the right side of this tab you can specify up to 6 bar sets (quantity, size, vertical location and start/stop endpoints). Each bar set is referenced on the sketch with a color shown as a dot to the left of the set description. The column highlighted in light blue titled "Dist of bar center....from...." is how you set the vertical position of the bar sets in the beam. When you look at the top one, you can read it as "The top bar set is 3 inches from the bottom of the beam". Note that the module will know whether the bars are in tension or compression and will handle the calculations properly. The item labeled Bar Position This Span defines the starting and ending location of the bar ends with respect to the left end of each respective span. The data in the screen capture below shows that bar set #1 and #2 run from the left end (0.0 ft) to 25.0 ft from the left end of Span 1. Using these starting and ending locations you can fine tune the bar layout and end cutoffs.
Span Loads No differences from other materials. All Span Loads No differences from other materials. Load Combinations No differences from other materials. Results Tabs This set of tabs provides detailed results for the current calculation. The vertical tabs on the left edge of the screen allow you to select the three major areas available for review: Calculations, Sketch, and Diagram. The Calculations tab offers the following results options:
281
Summary Results provides details for shear, moment and deflection for the governing load combinations. Shear results are not shown here...they are summarized on a separate tab that gives the required stirrup layout.
Max. Combinations provides detailed results for each beam segment for each load combination. These results are a consolidation to the highly detailed incremental results on the MV-D Summary tab.
M-V-D Summary - LRFD/Strength Stress Combinations shows highly detailed moment and shear results for each beam and for each load combination. For multispan beams using Automatic Unbalanced Live Load Placement there may be thousands of lines of results.
M-V-D Summary - Service Load Deflections shows highly detailed deflection results for all load combinations. When each load combination is expanded by clicking
Calculation Modules
282
the [+] icon, you will see the deflections along the entire beam. You will also see the effective moment of inertia used in that region. (Remember that the effective moment of inertia is calculated based on service-level moments at many locations along the length of each span.)
M-V-D Summary - Cross Section Values shows the moment capacities and moment of inertia for all of the identified cross sections. The module has examined all of the spans you defined and looked for identical reinforcing layouts. It has eliminated the duplicates, and for simplicity, it only lists the unique reinforced cross sections here.
M-V-D Summary - Design Shear shows the shear stirrup requirements along the span(s) as required by the governing load combinations that generate the highest shear at each section. The column labeled Comment indicates the ACI code condition that governs the requirement for shear reinforcing at each design location.
283
Calculation Modules
284
10.2.5 Composite Steel Beam

This module provides analysis and design of AISC steel sections acting compositely with a concrete slab that is continuously connected to the compression flange of the beam with suitable shear connectors. Factors provided for in the module include: The concrete slab can be either full depth or cast over formed steel decking, with rib orientation perpendicular or parallel to the beam. Stud capacity can be calculated by the module using standard AISC procedure. Normal or lightweight concrete may be used for both strength and deflection calculations. Both shored and unshored construction techniques can be analyzed by the module. ASD or LRFD analysis methods can be chosen. Flexible specification of shear studs is available. Very flexible loading specification, including the ability to specify loads applied before curing, loads removed after curing, and loads applied after curing. Single and multiple span composite beams can be designed. Extensive load combination capability. The module can use any section from the internal AISC databases, and provides automatic member selection incorporating user-specified criteria.
285
General Data Tab This tab gathers all input except for the beam section size and loads. To the left you can select AISC 360-05 ASD or LRFD methods. Note that these methods are somewhat different from prior AISC codes, and the user should be familiar with them, of course. To the right is the complete ability to specify the slab, its effective width, stud information and optional metal deck specification.
For Qn you can enter the value directly or click the calculation dialog:
button to display the stud capacity
Calculation Modules
286
When you click the checkbox for Slab on Metal Deck, the associated input fields appear to allow the selection of a manufactured deck product, or the manual specification of the required deck properties. Click the button to display the metal deck selection window as shown below, or simply enter the deck cross section profile in the dimension input fields:
287
Partial Composite Action This area provides three ways to have the module calculate stud requirements. Full Composite tells the module to use the number of studs necessary to provide full Vh shear resistance for the slab to beam Specify % Composite allows you to enter a % of maximum composite action. The module will then determine the number of studs needed for that Vh' and complete the bending capacity calculations. Calc Min Studs tells the module to calculate the minimum number of studs (greater than 25% composite per code) that will adequately supply the allowable moment for the actual moment.
Beam Span Data Tab This is basically the same tab used for a normal steel beam except that there is no ability to specify unbraced compression flange lengths. For regions of positive moment, the top flange is considered to be continuously braced by its composite connection to the concrete slab. For regions of negative moment, the bottom flange is also considered to be continuously braced.
Calculation Modules
288
Span Loads Tab This tab is basically the same as the normal load entry for other beam design modules except for two differences: 1- There are two checkboxes that allow you to select whether you want the module to automatically calculate and apply the beam self weight and slab self weight. 2- There are three additional checkboxes that allow you to indicate when the specified load is applied. 75% curing has historically been considered the point at which the concrete slab has cured enough to work compositely with the steel beam.
Load Combinations Tab No differences from other materials.
Results Tabs: This set of tabs provides detailed results for the current calculation. The vertical tabs on the left edge of the screen allow you to select the three major areas available for review: Calculations, Sketch, and Diagram. The Calculations tab offers the following results options: Summary Results tab presents the maximum/governing values from all of the results presented on the Max. Combinations tab. The module looks for the maximum bending stress ratio and presents the components that are calculated to create that ratio.
289
For the bending stress item the module reports the Construction bending ratio which considers all loads specified to be applied to the beam before curing. The resulting moment is compared to the capacity of the steel section acting alone (non-compositely). For the item reported as After Curing, the module takes the moments calculated before curing and subtracts moments due to loads removed after curing and then adds in the moments created from loads applied only after curing. That moment is then compared to the full composite section moment capacity for the percentage of shear connection you have specified. Given in the results is the load combination that creates the governing values along with the span location and span id. For maximum deflection, the module calculates a deflection of the non-composite steel section resisting all of the loads applied before curing , then deducts the deflection due to the loads that are removed after curing, and then superimposes the deflection based on a composite section resisting the loads applied after curing. Note! The screen shown below which gives information for Construction loads is only for unshored beams. For shored beams the Construction portion of moments is not applicable, so it is not shown.
Max Combinations tab presents in more concise detail the bending and shear values for all load combinations. Here is the summary of unshored result values: Ma-Const is the moment due to loads applied before curing. Mn-Stl/Omega is the allowable moment on steel section alone according to ASD design. Ma-NonConst includes the moments generated by loads applied before and after curing less the loads removed after curing. Mn-Tr/Omega is the allowable moment for the composite steel/slab section for the percentage of shear connection you specify calculated according to ASD.
Calculation Modules
290
When LRFD is used, the allowable nomenclature will change to the Mn value times Phi (instead of divided by Omega).
Here is the screen for shored cases:
Studs tab presents the shear connector density for certain span sections. When point loads are present, this chart may list more detailed spacing requirements because of the shear change between applied point loads.
M-V-D Summary presents moment, shear, and deflection results. Four screen captures of this tab are shown below. Depending upon the ASD or LRFD selection and whether the beam is shored or unshored, these lists will present different values and headings. ASD/Service Stress Combinations - SHORED:
291
ASD/Service Stress Combinations - UNSHORED:
LRFD/Strength Stress Combinations - SHORED:
LRFD/Strength Stress Combinations - UNSHORED:
Calculation Modules
292
Service Deflections - SHORED:
Service Deflections - UNSHORED:
Reactions tab has two versions, one for shored and one for unshored construction. The only differences are the load combinations and the explanations of load applications listed. "Dbc" stands for Dead load applied before curing. "Dac" stands for Dead load applied after curing. "Dra" stands for Dead load removed after curing.
293
Properties tab shows the calculations for transformed section properties calculated in increments of 1% shear connection, from 100% down to the code minimum 25%. "I Lower Bound" and "I Constant Stiffness" are terms described in AISC 360-05.
The Sketch tab provides two ways to view a graphic representation of the beam currently being designed: Span & Loads tab:
Cross Section tab:
Calculation Modules
294
295
10.2.6 Wood Ledger

Need more? Ask Us a Question The wood ledger module provides the ability to calculate moments and shears in the ledger, as well as actual and allowable bearing loads on the attaching bolts. The module allows the ledger to be attached to concrete or another wood member, and it automatically calculates the proper allowable bolt values. All calculations are according to 2005 NDS and either 2006 IBC or 2009 IBC. Allowable bolt capacity at an angle to the grain is calculated using Hankinson's formula.
Calculation Modules
296
General Tab This tab collects information on the main ledger size and stress grade, and bolt information. Ledger Data: Enter the actual dimensions (not nominal) and the wood species of the ledger. The specific gravity will be retrieved from the internal databases (you can also revise the specific gravity). Wood Stress Grade: Use the [Browse] button to access the built-in NDS stress database and retrieve the Fb and Fv values. You can also edit these values separately. Bolting Data: Enter the bolt diameter and spacing. The yield strength of the bolt is fixed at 45 ksi in this module. ASD or LRFD: Select the design method to be used. Load factoring and allowable stress calculations will applied accordingly. Values of KF and phi are automatically determined and applied for the LRFD method.
When "Attached to Concrete" is set to [No] When the user specifies the ledger is not attached to concrete, this implies that the ledger is attached to a supporting wood member. The display will change to allow the width and species of the supporting member to be entered.
297
The following sketch clarifies the width dimension required for a wood supporting member:
Loads Tab This tab allows you to apply vertical and lateral (in the plane of the wall) loads to the ledger. One set of uniform load values can be specified, and it will be considered to act consistently along all areas of the ledger. For calculations purposes, this module considers the ledger a continuous beam over multiple supports. One set of repeating point loads can be specified, where the input collects the magnitude, the starting location, and the spacing between subsequent loads. The module will consider all locations of the point loads over enough ledger spans between bolts to determine the governing case. For example, say your ledger bolting is set to 36" and the point load is set to 15". There will be multiple point loads between bolts, and on the NEXT span, the point
Calculation Modules
298
loads will be in different relative positions with respect to the bolts. The module analyzes all conditions of that bolt pattern over enough ledger spans to determine the governing point load offset. One set of horizontal (lateral) shear loads is allowed, in order to simulate wind or seismic load applied to the ledger and acting in the plane of the supporting wall.
Load Combinations Tab This is the typical load combination tab with entries for load duration factors CD (ASD) and (LRFD). Selecting the [Auto Reverse Wind Factors] and/or [Auto Reverse Seismic Factors] buttons creates additional load combinations that insert "-W" and "-E" whenever W and E are used.
299
Results Tabs This set of tabs provides detailed results for the current calculation. The vertical tabs on the left edge of the screen allow you to select the two major areas available for review: Calculations and Sketch. The Calculations tab offers the following results options: Results tab presents a summary of the design for the current member by reporting the following: Maximum Ledger Bending shows the load combination, applied moment and actual and allowable bending stresses. Note that no slenderness is considered for the ledger. Maximum Ledger Shear shows the load combination, applied moment and actual and allowable shear stresses for vertical loads only. These stresses are taken at the point of bolt support of the ledger and no subtraction of uniform loads within a distance "ledger depth" from that support is considered. Maximum Bolt Bearing Summary Shows the vertical and horizontal components of force acting on the bolt for the governing condition. "Allow Diagonal Bolt Force" is the result of allowable parallel to grain and perpendicular to grain bolt capacities used for the "Angle of Resultant" in a Hankinson formula calculation. Dowel Bearing Strengths give the allowable stress and resulting allowable bolt bearing stress considering NDS procedures and strengths and bolt size the user has entered.
Calculation Modules
300
Allowable Bolt Capacity tab provides the details of the bolt capacities according to the chosen NDS calculation method.
M & V Details tab summarizes the design values according to load combination for moment, shear and bolt forces.
301
The Sketch tab provides a graphic representation of the ledger currently being designed:
Calculation Modules
302
10.2.7 Masonry Lintel

Need more? Ask Us a Question This module provides design analysis for concrete masonry lintels subject to vertical and lateral loads. Lintels can have fixed or pinned ends for most typical conditions, and the user can specify rebar sets within the depth of the lintel. Vertical loads can be dead and live uniform and concentrated loads. You can have up to four loads of each type, and the uniform loads can be full or partial length. The module provides analysis for both seismic and wind loads for each recalculation. You can specify seismic factors that apply to the lintel's weight and a wind load. To allow the module to model different concrete block types, you can specify either lightweight or medium weight block, and additionally enter a lintel weight multiplication factor. For both the vertical and lateral bending and shear directions, the module calculates allowable bending moments and shear stresses. Also, for both directions, actual moments and shears due to all entered loads are calculated. Final results consist of combined stress ratio calculations for all combinations or dead, live, seismic, and wind vertical and lateral moments and shears.
Unique Features
303
This module calculates all vertical and lateral moments and shears and combines them for all possible stress ratios. This is a very thorough evaluation of combined stresses for seismic and wind design. The module also provides the ability to modify the material weight, automatically reverse seismic and/or wind loadings, and model both fix-fix and pin-pin end fixity conditions. Assumptions & Limitations When the lintel's fixity is set to Fixed, both vertical and lateral bending are considered fixed. General Tab This tab provides data entry for the lintel dimensions, material properties and lateral loads. Clear Span and Lintel Depth are used to calculate the beam bending and shears. Thickness is the nominal masonry thickness. The true thickness is determined from internal tables. End Fixity controls whether the analysis will consider the lintel to be pinned or fixed. Pinned results in higher center span moments and is probably conservative, however fixed is closer to the true construction. Calculate & Include Vertical Lintel Weight tells the module to calculate the lintel self-weight and add it as a uniform load across the full span. Material Data defines the allowable stressed for masonry and reinforcing steel. Wall Weight Multiplier allows the user to factor up or down the lintel self weight that is pulled from internal tables. Block Type selects the density of the CMU used for self weight. Lateral Loads allows you to specify wind and seismic loads that are applied horizontally and perpendicular to the span of the lintel. Seismic Weight factor is a multiplier applied to the lintel self weight to create a laterally applied uniform loads.
Calculation Modules
304
Reinforcing Tab This tab allows you to specify the longitudinal reinforcing in the lintel.
Rebar Size Enter the rebar size used for all longitudinal bar sets to be used in the lintel. # Bars Each Face Enter the number of rebars at each face of the wall for each bar set. In the example problem, only one #6 was used on each face for all three bar sets. Rebar Distance from Top & Bottom of Lintel to Centerline of rebar group Distance from the top and bottom of the lintel respectively to the center of area of the bar set. These distances will be used as d for vertical bending strength calculations. # Bar Sets Vertically Enter the number of bar sets in the lintel. Bar Spacing
305
This is the clear distance between the bars on each face in a bar set. IT IS ASSUMED THAT THE BARS ARE CENTERED ALONG THE LINTEL VERTICAL CENTERLINE. d used for lateral bending strength calculations is calculated as: Spacing Between Bars + (Actual Thickness - Spacing Between Bars) / 2 Shear Reinforcement When you click [Yes] you can specify the vertical shear reinforcement used in the lintel. The results will then reflect the allowable & actual shear stress ratios. Vertical Load Tab This tab allows you to specify point loads and distributed loads applied to the lintel.
Load Combinations Tab This is the typical load combination tab used throughout the SEL. "LDF" is a Load Duration Factor that will be applied to allowable stresses and is only available for the ASD design method.
Output & Graphics Tabs Results Tab
Calculation Modules
306
This tab summarizes the calculated moments, shears and combined stress ratios for the lintel. Ratios for bending and shear are provided for both vertical and lateral load applications. There are no calculations for combined vertical & lateral stresses.
M & V Results Tab This tab provides full details for all actual and allowable stresses for all load combinations.
Design Values Tab This tab summarizes allowable stress calculations. When ASD is used, the tab looks like this:
307
And when LRFD is used, the tab looks like this:
Sketch Tab
Calculation Modules
308
10.2.8 Steel Beam with Torsional Loads

The Steel Beam with Torsional Loads module offers the ability to analyze and design a single-span steel beam for applied loads that create shear, bending, and torsion. It can be a useful tool for situations where beams have concentrated or distributed loads that are applied eccentrically, or where beams are subjected to torsional moments. General Data tab: The General Data tab allows you to set the span length, and support conditions in much the same way that this information is provided in the other beam modules. Refer to the topic for additional explanation, but remember that this particular module is limited to singlespan conditions. In addition to these pieces of data, the General Data tab also provides input fields for the compression edge lateral bracing condition, the design method, material properties, and an option to force the Cb value to 1.0, as shown below:
Beams
Beam Span Data tab: The Beam Span Data tab is used to specify the span length, the allowable deflection ratios, and to select the steel section under consideration.
309
Span Loads tab: The Span Loads tab allows you to specify loads on one span at a time. The behavior of the tools on this tab is very similar to the tools described for use in the other beam modules, except that it introduces the ability to specify load eccentricities and the ability to indicate that concentrated moments should be considered as torsional moments. Refer to the topic for additional explanation.
Beams
Load Combinations tab: The Load Combinations tab provides a view of the load combinations that will be analyzed. It also offers the ability to: Select a different set of load combinations, Modify the values used as load factors, and
Calculation Modules
310
Turn certain combinations on and off. Refer to the

Beams
topic for additional explanation.
The Steel Beam with Torsional Loads module offers output options that are analogous to the output options provided by the other beam modules, with the exception that the results include torsional design considerations. The lower half of the screen is dedicated to the display of results. The vertical strip of tabs on the left side of the display allow you to choose between Calculations, Sketch, and Diagram as explained below: Calculations: The Calculations tab offers four sub-tabs: Summary Results: Displays extreme flange normal stress, extreme flange and web shear stress, extreme deflections, extreme rotations, and extreme reactions.
Maximum Combinations: Displays maximum stress ratio, extreme moments and shears, flange normal stresses due to bending and due to torsion, flange shear stress due to torsion, web shear stress due to bending and due to torsion, for all load combinations.
M-V-D: Summary: Displays moment, shear, unbraced length, flange normal stress, flange shear stress, web shear stress, and deflections at small increments along all spans. Moment, shear, and stresses are displayed for all load
311
combinations. Deflection is displayed for service load combinations only.
Support Reactions: Displays support reactions for all supports, for all load combinations.
Sketch: Displays a sketch of the beam, indicating span lengths, support conditions, and applied loads.
Diagram: Displays a graphic depiction of the beam with superimposed graphs of Moment, Shear, Deflection or Rotation for a selected load combination, or for an envelope of all load combinations.
Calculation Modules
312
313
10.3
Columns
Click Here For General Information Video
The Structural Engineering Library has a single basic column design module that supports Wood, Steel, Concrete and Masonry material types. There are some portions of the graphical user interface that remain consistent for all materials, and this topic will focus on those items. For detailed information about each of the material-specific calculation modules, please review the respective topics below. General Information The screen capture below shows the portions of the General tab that remain constant for all four material types.
You can easily select a different column material by clicking one of the four material buttons. When you do, the program will load the user interface that is specific to the chosen material. Overall Column Height is the total height of the column and does not have anything to do with slenderness lengths. This length is used for three things: to describe the overall height of the column for the purpose of calculating self weight (if specified), to locate the topmost point of load application, and to perform the bending analysis when lateral loads are applied. Rotational End Fixities let you specify how the ends of the columns are or are not attached to boundary conditions. Each condition explicitly describes the translational and rotational boundary conditions at both the top and bottom of the column. Vertical Loads Vertical loads can be applied to any location along the height of the column. You use this
Calculation Modules
314
tab to build a table of applied loads with the [Add], [Copy] and [Delete] buttons. Include Self Weight option tells the module to automatically calculate the weight of the column and add it as an additional dead load (which will be factored per "D" load combination factor and applied at the top of the column). Description lets you describe each load you are applying. Load Eccentricity has "X" and "Y" eccentricity locations so the loads can create Y-Y and X-X axis moments respectively. Location from Base is where you specify the vertical location of the axial load with respect to the bottom of the column.
Lateral Loads On this tab you can specify loads that will be applied along the X or Y axes of the column (non-axial loads). Applied Load Type & Values has a drop-down list box where you can choose Full Uniform, Partial Uniform, Point Load and Moment load types. Description lets you describe each load you are applying. Moment Axis is where you specify about which column axis the load creates its applied moment. Location from Base is where you specify the vertical location of the lateral load with respect to the bottom of the column.
315
Load Combination Tab This tab allows you to specify the load combinations to use for the analysis. The tabs change appearance slightly between ASD and LRFD selections. There are also optional load duration factor entries for wood and masonry design. Please see the screen captures below for variations based on the selected material. Steel ASD
Steel LRFD
Calculation Modules
316
Concrete LRFD
Wood ASD
Wood LRFD
Masonry ASD
317
Masonry LRFD
Calculation Modules
318
10.3.1 Column Slenderness

Click Here For Column Slenderness Video
The Slenderness tab allows you to specify the column bracing, which will be considered in axial capacity calculations. It is important to understand that the settings on the Slenderness tab serve double-duty. When the column has applied bending forces, these slenderness settings also define the unbraced compression edge lengths, and therefore they affect the calculation of allowable bending stresses. In most of the column modules there are two tabs: "X-X" and "Y-Y Axis Column Slenderness". Let's start with the all-important definition of the axis reference for slenderness. Buckling failure of a column can be thought of as an uncontrolled and excessive deflection in the direction of a particular axis. When defining slenderness, one of the important values is the distance between points that brace the column against movement (or failure) along a particular axis. The column modules ask you to specify the distance between points of bracing that prevent buckling along the column's local X-X or Y-Y axis. The X-X axis is always parallel to the "width" dimension of the column. The Y-Y axis is always parallel to the "depth" dimension of the column. For example, the "X-X" axis of a steel W14 section is parallel to the flanges. The "X-X Axis Column Slenderness" defines the distance between points that prevent the column from buckling along its "X-X" axis. In the Structural Engineering Library, slenderness is entered as the distance between points bracing a member against buckling in the direction of the specified axis. In the screen capture immediately below, we have selected [Fully braced "X" Axis]. This means that the column is fully braced against buckling along its X-X axis, which is parallel to the width dimension. If this was a steel "W" section, then the column is fully braced against buckling parallel to the flanges. All materials, column fully braced This selection sets the column as fully braced, and no slenderness effects will be evaluated.
319
All materials, typical simple slenderness specification This selection allows you to enter the unbraced height to use for the column slenderness calculation. Also available are selections for the typical slenderness multipliers ("K" factors) for various end conditions. Note! End fixity is specified on a different tab in the column modules. These slenderness factors do not alter the end fixity you specified for the column, nor do they get determined automatically by the end fixities that you specified.
All materials, typical slenderness with user-defined slenderness factor "K" This selection allows you to enter the unbraced height and the slenderness "K" factor to use for the column slenderness calculation. Note! End fixity is specified on a different tab in the column modules. These slenderness factors do not alter the end fixity you specified for the column, nor do they get determined automatically by the end fixities that you specified.
Calculation Modules
320
Concrete & Steel Only For concrete and steel you will see an option to Compute K using adjacent members. This advanced selection lets you select the framing condition above and below the column, and using the entered lengths and EI values, it will use standard equations for Non-Sway columns to calculate the effective "K" factor. Keep in mind that this option is used to define the relative stiffnesses of the framing in the plane of buckling that is being considered. For example, when using the X-X Axis Column Slenderness tab, the plane under consideration is the plane in which the column's X-X axis lies.
Wood & Steel Only..... For wood and steel columns only, there is an option to [Enter Bracing Location], which allows you to divide the column up into several segments with different unbraced lengths.
321
Calculation Modules
322
10.3.2 Wood Column

This module designs wood columns that are subject to axial loads and lateral bending loads about both axes. The user can select ASD or LRFD design methods and has access to a large built-in database of wood sizes and NDS species stress grades. Values of KF and phi are automatically determined and applied for the LRFD method. All calculations are according to the 2005 NDS code. The screen capture below shows the full screen for wood column design. See items below for descriptions of items that are specific to the Wood Column module. For general description of the module, end fixity, loads, and load combinations click here 313 . For slenderness description click here 318 .
323
General Tab The Design Stresses area bubbled in the screen capture below is unique to the wood column selection. This area enables you to specify the base design values for the wood species and grade of interest.
You can either enter these values manually, or you can click the Wood Stress Database. Column Size Tab All of the information on this tab is unique to a wood column.
button to display the
The area bubbled in red is where you specify the column cross section. Use the button to display the built-in database of wood sections (solid-sawn, glulam, and manufactured sections are available). You can also enter the values manually. The area bubbled in blue provides allowable stress modification factors that you can specify. Please note that CF or CV values are automatically filled in. CF values are determined from the size and stress grade of the member (No. 1 and Utility grades have different values). CV values are calculated when a glu-lam section is specified. The area in green provides quick access to the built-in wood section database. Simply click the button of the section type and the list on the right will be populated automatically from the appropriate database. Then just click on a section to have its data loaded into the entries in the red area.
Calculation Modules
324
Results Tab This tab provides a summary of the stress ratios, reactions and deflections for the column. Max Axial + Bending Stress Ratio is the governing load combination for the column. Listed is the governing load load combination, the NDS formulas that is used and the location of the maximum stress ratio above the base of the column. Please note maximum stress ratio is what is being reported because it governs the design.....not necessarily the highest axial or bending stress. Max Shear Stress Ratio will probably never govern for a column design but is presented here with the governing load combination, location and allowable/actual stress values. Lateral Load Reactions and Deflections are the result of applied lateral loads.
Design Maximum Combinations Tab This tab lists the resulting maximum stress ratios for each load combination. This list is created by examining the detailed list (on the next tab) and determing the governing stress ratios for each load combination.
325
Detailed Results Tab - Stress This tab lists the detailed results at small increments along the height of the column for each load combination. For consistency, all of the column headings use labels directly from the NDS code. Note! This list scrolls to the right to display more information. See the successive screen captures below:
Scroll a little to the right....
Calculation Modules
326
And a little more....
And more still....
327
And then the final data column.....
Detailed Results Tab - Deflections This tab reports the deflections at incremental locations along the height of the column, for each service load condition (i.e. for individual load cases and for a set of built-in service load combinations), along each axis. It is important to understand that the deflection values indicated on this tab represent RELATIVE deflections. That is, they represent the distance from the deflected shape of the column to a straight-line chord drawn between the deflected locations of the top and bottom nodes of the column. This has significance when viewing the deflection data for a column that is fixed at the bottom and free to deflect at the top. If lateral loads are applied to this type of cantilevered column, it is reasonable to expect that the free top will deflect laterally. However, when viewing the results on the Service Load Deflections tab, the deflection at both the bottom AND the top will always be reported as zero, because this tab is reporting RELATIVE deflections, and by definition, the relative deflection of either endpoint of a member is zero. Do not interpret the results on the Service Load Deflections tab as ABSOLUTE deflections.
Calculation Modules
328
End Reactions Tab This tab provides the sideways (non-axial) reactions for individual load cases and for a set of built-in service load combinations, along each axis.
Sketch Tab
329
Axial-Shear-Moment Diagrams This tab provides comprehensive charting capability to view graphs of Axial load, Shear, Moment, and Deflection along the length of the member. Note that the graphs are oriented such that the right end of the graph represents the column base, and the left end of the graph represents the column top. This was done to maximize the scale of the graph based on the screen area available.
Pn-Pnx-Mny Diagrams This tab allows you to see the moment capacities about each axis given a certain allowable axial load. This is mostly for reference and can be considered a reverse application of the load capacity calculations. In the screen capture below we have selected a 30 degree angle. For a 1.1 kip axial load you can see the moment capacity values, Mnx and Mny.
Calculation Modules
330
331
10.3.3 Steel Column

This module designs steel columns that are subject to axial loads and lateral bending loads about both axes. The user can select ASD or LRFD methods and has access to a complete database of steel section sizes. All calculations are according to AISC 360-05. The screen capture below shows the full screen for steel column design. See items below for descriptions of items that are specific to the steel column design module. For general description of the module, end fixity, loads, and load combinations click here 313 . For slenderness description click here 318 .
General Tab
Calculation Modules
332
The area shown bubbled in the screen capture below is specific to the steel column selection. Here you can specify ASD or LRFD design procedure and specify the yield strength and elastic modulus of the steel member to be used.
Click the
button to display the Steel Fy Selections dialog to select a standard grade.
Column Size Tab All items on this tab are specific to a steel column. The item circled in red is where you can type in the typical section name, press [Tab], and the section will be searched and retrieved from our built-in database. Or you can click the button, and you can select a section from the built-in AISC database.
The items circled in blue are the section properties for the section you have chosen. The item circled in green is the Quick-List". Click on one of the many buttons with a section letter and the full list of those sections will be displayed to the right. Simply click on a section and it will be assigned to the red and blue areas.
333
The button circled in pink will display the Steel Member Design dialog (see below).
This tool checks all of the steel sections for the selected type (W is selected in this case). A section will be judged to pass if the maximum stress ratio entered is not exceeded and the depth measurements and depth class are not exceeded. We use the term "Depth Class" to refer to the nominal dimension of the family to which the section belongs (ex: W14). It does refer to the actual depth of the section. All sections starting with "W14" are of the "14" depth class.
Results Tab This tab provides a summary of the stress ratios, reactions and deflections for the
Calculation Modules
334
column. Max Axial + Bending Stress Ratio is the governing load combination for the column. Listed is the governing load load combination, the AISC formulas that are used, and the location of the maximum stress ratio above the base of the column. Please note that the maximum stress ratio is being reported (along with its location) because it governs the overall design, even though it may not necessarily be the highest axial stress or the highest bending stress experienced anywhere in the column. Max Shear Stress Ratio will probably never govern for a normally loaded column design. But it is presented here with the governing load combination, location and allowable/actual stress values. Lateral Load Reactions and Deflections are the result of applied lateral loads.
Design Maximum Combinations Tab This tab lists the resulting maximum stress ratios for each load combination. This list is created by examining the detailed list (on the next tab) and determining the governing stress ratios for each load combination.
Detailed A-M-V-D Results Tab - Stresses This tab lists the detailed results at small increments along the height of the column, for
335
each load combination. For consistency, all of the column headings are taken directly from AISC. Note! This list scrolls to the right to display more information.
Detailed A-M-V-D Results Tab - Service Load Deflections This tab reports the deflections at incremental locations along the height of the column, for each service load condition (i.e. for individual load cases and for a set of built-in service load combinations), along each axis.
Reactions Tab This tab provides the sideways (non-axial) reactions for individual load cases and for a set of built-in service load combinations, along each axis.
Calculation Modules
336
Sketch Tab
Axial-Shear-Moment Diagrams This tab provides comprehensive charting capability to view graphs of Axial load, Shear, Moment, and Deflection along the length of the member. Note that the graphs are oriented such that the right end of the graph represents the column base, and the left end of the graph represents the column top. This was done to maximize the scale of the graph based on the screen area available.
337
10.3.4 Concrete Column

This module designs concrete columns that are subject to axial loads and lateral bending loads about both axes. The module only uses strength design for concrete. All calculations are according to the ACI 318-05 or ACI 318-08 code, depending upon whether IBC 06 or IBC 09 has been selected as the governing building code. The screen capture below shows the full screen for concrete column design. See items below for descriptions of items that are specific to the concrete column design module. For general description of the module, end fixity, loads, and load combinations click here 313 . For slenderness description click here 318 .
General Tab
Calculation Modules
338
The area circled in red in the screen capture below is specific to the concrete column selection.
The two buttons and immediately set the value for elastic modulus "E" to the values as described on the button.
Concrete Shape This tab is specific to the concrete column selection. It allows you to select from 12 different column shapes. Simply click the button surrounding the column shape icon and the screen below will change to allow specific data input for measurements and reinforcing layout. Following the screen capture below we will show ALL the data input areas for ALL the column shapes with descriptions as needed. Note that this module does a very detailed biaxial analysis of the column cross section using exact numerical methods. Circular Column
339
Square Column
Calculation Modules
340
Rectangular Column
341
Trapezoidal Column
Calculation Modules
342
"L" Shaped Column
343
"Z" Shaped Column
Calculation Modules
344
Six Sided Column
"T" Shaped Column
345
"I" Shaped Column
Calculation Modules
346
Cross Shaped Column
347
Octagon Column
Rectangular Tube Column
Calculation Modules
348
Results Tab
Design Results Tab - Load Combination Summary
349
Design Results Tab - Load Combination Detailed Results
A-M-V-D Results - Strength Design Results
A-M-V-D Results - Service Load Deflections
Calculation Modules
350
P-Mx-My Capacities
Section Properties
Reactions
351
Sketch
P-M Diagrams
A-V-M-D Diagrams
Calculation Modules
352
Theoretical Basis
Click here to view Concrete Column Module Theoretical Basis
353
10.3.5 Masonry Column

This module designs masonry columns that are subject to axial loads and lateral bending loads about one axis. The user can select ASD or LRFD methods. All calculations are according to the ACI 530-05 code. The screen capture below shows the full screen for masonry column design. See items below for descriptions of items that are specific to the masonry column design module. For general description of the module, end fixity, loads, and load combinations click here 313 . For slenderness description click here 318 .
General Tab The area circled in red below is specific to the masonry column selection. You have the
Calculation Modules
354
choice of using Working Stress or Strength Design methods. The column capacity is determined by creating a P-M interaction diagram, so that the effect of compressive force is included in the calculation of allowable moment capacity. For working stress this will result in significantly higher capacities than the older methods that calculated an actual stress ratio using (fa/Fa + fb/Fb).
Here is the description when the Strength Design method is selected...
Masonry Tab All of the information on this tab is specific to masonry column design.
355
The input items in the red bubble define the material properties of the column and reinforcing used. The input items in the blue bubble let you define the cross section size, reinforcing, and orientation of the column. Under Specify Column Dimensions we've made it easy by providing buttons for the common nominal dimensions of a masonry column. Click the Width and Depth buttons and you will see the actual dimension appear in the bottom of the area. Note that "Width" is parallel to the "x-x" axis and "Depth" is parallel to the "y-y" axis. In the lower right you can specify the bar size and bar count to be used on each face of the column. The graphic will change accordingly as your input changes.
Results Tab
Design Maximum Combinations This tab summarizes the maximum stress ratios for each load combination.
Calculation Modules
356
A-M-V-D Results: Strength Combinations This tab presents the very detailed allowable and actual values for each load combination.
A-M-V-D Results: Service Load Deflections This tab summarizes the lateral deflections of the column at increments along its height. These values will be nonzero only if lateral loads are applied or the axial load is applied with an eccentricity.
P-M Surface Data This tab lists the full analysis results for the column.
357
Reactions This tab reports axial reactions and lateral reactions due to lateral loads or due to axial loads that have an eccentricity.
Sketch
A-V-M Diagrams
Calculation Modules
358
Pn-Mnx-Mny Diagrams
359
10.4
General Walls
General Introductory Video:
Click Here for Video
Calculation Modules
360
10.4.1 Cantilevered Retaining Wall

Here is a listing of design capabilities contained in this Cantilevered Retaining Wall module: Cantilevered stem wall can have up to five different stem sections, of either masonry or concrete, each with a different thickness and/or reinforcing size and spacing. You may also include a weightless fence on top of the wall for the purpose of collecting additional wind load. Surcharges on either side of the wall. Sloped backfill. Axial dead and live load applied to the top of the wall, with eccentricity. Wind acting on a wall projection above grade. Add lateral loads against the stem -- uniform or concentrated (impact) loads. Effect of an adjacent footing behind the wall, line or point loading. Option to use user-defined active and passive pressure or input angle of internal friction and module will compute pressures using the Rankine or Coulomb formulas. Specify percent passive and frictional resistance to be used to prevent sliding. Option to specify sliding resistance using cohesion, in lieu of friction. Automatic sizing of footing Window Layout The retaining wall module divides the screen into a left and right portion. The left portion contains all of the input data (and in some cases intermediate calculated values). The right portion contains the calculated results and sketches.
361
GENERAL WALL INFORMATION This tab allows you to enter the general information affecting the retaining wall. More specific data will be entered on other tabs dedicated specifically to the stem, footing and loads.
Calculation Modules
362
Retained Height This is the height of retained earth measured from top of footing to the top of soil behind the stem (over the heel). When the backfill is sloped, the soil will slope away and upwards from this height. The actual retained height used for overturning and soil pressure calculations will be the retained height projected at the vertical plane of the back of the heel, but for stem moments, no such increase will be made. Using the spin-buttons you can vary the retained height in 3-inch increments. You can also type in any number. After each entry, you can press [Tab] to advance to the next entry, or use your mouse to reposition the cursor. Wall Height above Retained Soil Use this entry to specify if the wall extends above the retained height. This entry is
363
typically used to define a "screen wall" projection above the retained soil. This extension can be used as a weightless "Fence", or it can be defined as a concrete or masonry stem section without any soil retained behind it. You can enter wind load on this projection using the entry labeled "Load @ stem above soil" on the Loads tab. We'll handle the fence when we get to the Stem design screen. The total height of the wall (above the footing) will be equal to the Retained Height plus the Wall Height Above Retained Soil. Height of Soil over Toe Measured from top of footing to top of soil on the toe side, this may vary from a few inches to a few feet depending upon site conditions. (Note that it is specified in inches.) It is used to calculate passive soil resistance (but its effective depth can be modified by the "Soil over toe to Neglect" entry in the Sliding Resistance category on the Footing tab). This depth of soil is also used to calculate the resisting moment, and to reduce the net lateral sliding force. You can negate the latter effects on the Options screen if desired. Water table height over heel If you want to design for a water table condition, enter the maximum height from top of footing to water table level. The module will then compute the added pressures for saturated soil on the heel side of the footing, including buoyancy effect. It will also calculate increased moments and shears on the stem, and an increased overturning moment. Dont enter a height more than the retained height, nor a liquid other than water. If the water table is near the top of the retained height, suggest using saturated soil density and active pressure for the full retained height. Soil Slope You may enter any backfill slope behind the wall. Use the drop-down list box or type the slope ratio as Horiz/Vert. The soil must be level or slope upward. Negative backfill slopes (grade sloping downward, away from the wall) are not allowed. The module will use this slope to: 1) include the weight of a triangular wedge of soil over the heel as vertical load, and 2) compute overturning based upon an assumed vertical plane at the back face of the footing extending from the bottom of the footing to the ground surface a steeper slope will result in a higher overturning moment. The module will not accept a backfill slope steeper than the angle of internal friction.
Allow Soil Bearing The maximum allowable soil bearing pressure for static conditions. Using the spin buttons you can increment in 50 psf steps. Typical values vary from 1,000 psf to 4,000 psf or more. Soil Density (heel side) Enter the soil density for all earth (or water if applicable) above the heel of the footing. This weight is used to calculate overturning resistance forces and soil pressures using the weight of the soil block over the projecting heel of the footing. When surcharges are applied over the soil, the surcharges are transformed to equivalent
Calculation Modules
364
uniform lateral loads acting on the wall by the ratio force = (Surcharge/ Density) *Lateral Load. Input this value in lbs. per cubic foot. Usual values are 110 pcf to 120 pcf. More if saturated soil. Water is usually assumed to be 64 pcf. Soil Density (toe side) Enter the soil density on the toe side, which may be different than the heel side. When surcharges are applied over the soil on the toe side, the surcharge is transformed to equivalent uniform lateral loads acting on the wall by the ratio force = (Surcharge/ Density)*Lateral Load. Input this value in lbs. per cubic foot. Typical values are 110 pcf to 120 pcf. Lateral Pressure Method Here you can choose between E.F.P. (Equivalent Fluid Pressure), Rankine formula or Coulomb formula. Based on your choice for Lateral Pressure Method, you will be offered the following input fields to fully define the lateral forces acting on the wall and footing. When the EFP Method is selected: Active Soil Pressure - Heel Side Enter the equivalent fluid pressure (EFP) for the soil being retained that acts to overturn and slide the wall toward the toe side. This pressure acts on the stem for stem section calculations, and on the total footing+wall+slope height for overturning, sliding, and soil pressure calculations. Commonly used values, assuming an angle of internal friction of 34, are 30 pcf for a level backfill; 35 pcf for a 4:1 slope; 38 pcf for a 3:1 slope; 43 pcf for a 2:1 slope; and 55 pcf for a 1.5:1 slope. These values are usually provided by the geotechnical engineer. When the retained soil is sloped, a vertical component of the lateral earth pressure over the heel can be applied vertically downward in the plane of the back of the footing. You can choose to apply this force for overturning resistance, sliding resistance, and/or for soil pressure calculations, by checking the boxes on the Options tab. Active Soil Pressure - Toe Side Enter the active pressure to be used on the toe side of the wall. This active pressure is used along with the "Soil Height over Toe" value (entered on the Sliding tab) to calculate a stabilizing soil force on the wall. This front side of the wall is assumed to be level. The active pressure from soil over the toe counteracts the heel-side active pressure to reduce net overturning and net sliding force. This action is arguable, therefore the default is set to not use this counteracting force. Passive Pressure This is the resistance of the soil in front of the wall and footing to being pushed against to resist sliding. Its value is in psf per foot of depth (pcf). This value is usually obtained from the geotechnical engineer. Its value usually varies from 100 pcf to about 350 pcf.
365
When the Rankine or Coulomb Method is selected: Soil Friction Angle This value is entered in degrees and is the angle of internal friction of the soil. This value is usually provided by a geotechnical engineer from soils tests, but can also be found in reference books or building codes for various typical soil classifications. This value is used along with Soil Density within the standard Rankine and Coulomb equations to determine "Ka" and "Kp" multipliers of density to give active and passive soil pressure values. Active Soil Pressure This value will be computed using the Rankine or Coulomb formulas. This represents the lateral earth pressure acting to slide and overturn the wall toward the toe side. The result will be presented in units of psf/ft. This pressure acts on the stem for stem section calculations, and on the total footing+wall+slope height for overturning, sliding, and soil pressure calculations. When the retained soil is sloped, a vertical component of the lateral earth pressure over the heel can be applied vertically downward in the plane of the back of the footing. You can choose to apply this force for overturning resistance, sliding resistance, and/or for soil pressure calculations, by checking the boxes on the Options tab. Passive Soil Pressure This value will also be computed using the Rankine or Coulomb formulas. This is the resistance of the soil in front of the wall to being pushed against to resist sliding. Its value is in psf per foot of depth (pcf). Common values usually vary from 100 pcf to about 350 pcf.
APPLIED LOADS This tab allows you to enter all the loads that will be applied to your retaining wall in addition to lateral earth pressure.
Calculation Modules
366
Wind Load on exposed stem above soil This wind force will be applied to that part of the stem projecting above the retained height defined by the entry "Wall height above retained soil." It is used to calculate overturning moment and sliding, stem design moment and shear, and soil pressures. Only positive values of wind load should be specified. This will ensure that the wind load acts in the direction of the active soil pressure, increasing the overturning moment, the sliding force, the soil bearing pressure, and shear and moment in the stem. Vertical Surcharge Surcharge over Toe This surcharge is treated as additional soil weight if the surcharge is 240 psf and the density is 120 pcf, then the module uses two feet of additional soil. Similarly, if 50 psf
367
is added for the weight of a slab over the footing, this will be equivalent to 0.41 feet of soil (50 / 120). This surcharge will affect sliding resistance and active toe pressure. Keep this in mind if modeling a point load toe surcharge. Use TOE Surcharge to resist sliding & overturning Checking this box will include the weight of soil overburden on the toe to resist overturning and add to its weight for frictional resistance. Surcharge over Heel This surcharge is considered uniformly applied to the top surface of the soil over the heel. It may be entered whether or not the ground surface is sloped, but it is unlikely a surcharge could apply to a sloped backfill. This surcharge is always taken as a vertical force. This surcharge is divided by the soil density and multiplied by the Active Pressure to create a uniform lateral load applied to the wall. You can choose to use this surcharge to resist sliding and overturning by clicking the box on the Options tab. Typical live load surcharges are 100 psf for light traffic and parking, and 250 psf for highway traffic. Use HEEL Surcharge to resist sliding & overturning Checking this box will include heel surcharge. If the surcharge includes live load, then using it to resist sliding and overturning could be non-conservative. In this situation, it might be advisable to deselect this checkbox. Vertical Load Applied to Top of Stem These loads are considered uniform load along the length of the wall. They are applied to the top of the topmost stem section and affect the design of masonry stems only. The dead and live loads are used to calculate stem design values and factored soil reaction pressures used for footing design. Only the dead load is used to resist overturning and sliding of the retaining wall. If a wall is subjected to a high axial load (say more than 3 kips/ft) it could cause a reversal of the bending moment in the heel. Under these conditions, it might be advisable to investigate the design with and without the high axial load, to be sure that an acceptable design is found for all conditions. Since slenderness ratios (h/t) for retaining walls are generally small, usually less than 10, and axial stresses are low, slenderness effects are checked but usually have a small effect. If a point load is applied to the top of a wall, such as a beam reaction, the point load is typically assumed to distribute itself laterally at a rate that is based on engineering judgment for the materials under consideration. As a result of this distribution, the point load will result in a uniformly distributed load of some relatively low magnitude by the time it reaches the base of the stem. This module does not have an explicit input field for point loads, so they must be represented as uniformly distributed loads. To properly account for the lateral distribution that is characteristic of an axial point load applied to a wall, the magnitude that is entered to represent the point load should consider this distribution effect. The top of the wall may also need to be checked by appended calculations for the localized effects of the full magnitude of the
Calculation Modules
368
concentrated load. Axial Load Eccentricity This is the eccentricity of the axial load with respect to the centerline of the uppermost stem section. Positive values of eccentricity move the load toward the toe, causing bending moments that are additive to those caused by the lateral soil pressure over the heel. Negative eccentricities are not accepted. Vertical Adjacent Footing Load This entry gives you the option of placing a footing (line or square) adjacent and parallel to the back face of the wall, and have its effect on the wall included in both the vertical and horizontal forces on the wall and footing. Refer to the General Reference Diagram for locations where input measurements should be taken. For "Line (Strip) Load" the entry is the total load per ft. parallel to the wall (not psf). If the adjacent footing is specified as "Square Footing" (not line load), the load entered should be the adjacent footing load divided by its dimension parallel to the wall, giving a pounds per lineal foot value, as for a continuous (line) footing. A Boussinesq analysis is used to calculate the vertical and lateral pressures acting on the stem and footing. The module uses equation (11-20a) in Bowles Foundation Analysis and Design, 5th Edition, McGraw-Hill, pages 630. When the Boussinesq analysis is used, the module may require additional computing time, depending upon the speed of your computer (hundreds of internal calculations are done after each entry). To avoid this delay (which occurs any time any entry is changed) we suggest you use a vertical load of zero until your data entry is nearly finalized. Then enter the actual footing load and modify your final values. For adjacent truck or highway loading, it may be preferable to use a heel surcharge (uniform) of 250 psf (or more), instead of treating it as an adjacent footing. It is generally not necessary to use this feature if the adjacent footing load is farther from the stem than the retained height, less the depth of the adjacent footing below the retained height, since at this distance it will not have significant effect on the wall. Wall to Footing Centerline Distance This is the horizontal distance from the center of the adjacent footing to the back face of the stem (measured at the retained height). The nearest edge of the footing should be at least a foot away from the wall face otherwise it is suggested to use an equivalent heel surcharge instead. Note: If the horizontal distance from the center of the adjacent footing to the back face of the stem is greater than the vertical distance from the top of the retaining wall footing to the bottom of the adjacent footing, then the effect on the retaining wall will be insignificant. Footing Width Width of the adjacent footing measured perpendicular to the wall. This is necessary to create a one-foot long by Width wide area over which the load is applied.
369
Height of Base Above (+) or Below (-) Retained Height Use this entry to locate the bottom of the adjacent footing with respect to the Retained Height. Entering a negative number places the footing below the Retained Height. A positive entry would typically only be used when the soil is sloped and the adjacent footing resides uphill. To insert a negative number, first type the number, then press the "-" (minus) sign. Note: If the Adjacent Footing is another retaining wall at a higher elevation, the Boussinesq analysis may be used for the vertical load applied to the soil from the wall, however the design must also consider the lateral (sliding) loads from that adjacent wall. This load could be applied as Added Lateral Load, however this is at the discretion of the designer and is not within the scope of the module. Caution is urged for this condition. See discussion in the companion book: Basics of Retaining Wall Design. For questionable soil or site conditions a global stability analysis is advised. Eccentricity This entry is provided in case the soil pressure under the adjacent footing is not uniform. Enter the eccentricity of the resultant force under the adjacent footing from the centerline of the adjacent footing. Positive eccentricity shifts the load toward the toe, resulting in greater pressure at the side of the adjacent footing closest to the stem of the retaining wall. The module will use the vertical load and eccentricity and create a trapezoidal pressure distribution under the adjacent footing for use with the Boussinesq analysis of vertical and lateral pressures. Footing Type This drop-down list box allows you to enter either an isolated footing using the "Square Footing" selection, or a continuous footing using the "Line Load" selection. Poisson's Ratio Since the resulting pressures are sensitive to Poissons Ratio, there is an entry allowing you to select a ratio from 0.30 to 0.55. This value should be provided by the geotechnical engineer. A value of 0.50 is often assumed. Lateral Load on Stem This input allows you to specify an additional uniformly distributed lateral load applied to the stem. This is for an impact point load, such as due to an impact of a car or similar force. Enter the load as a one-foot high increment, separating the "Height to Bottom" and "Height to Top" by one-half foot (or meter). Note: This load is not factored. To apply a load factor (such as for an impact load), increase the applied load proportionately (e.g. an impact load of 1000 lbs requiring a load factor of 2.0 would be entered as 2,000 lbs). You may need to do several designs to check load factor combinations. Keep in mind that when considering a concentrated lateral load, it may be possible to
Calculation Modules
370
reduce the magnitude to account for the fact that the load distributes horizontally at levels below the point of application. Height to Top This dimension defines the upper extent of the added lateral load measured from the top of the footing. Do not enter a dimension that exceeds "retained height" plus "Wall height above retained soil". Height to Bottom This dimension defines the lower extent (or bottom) of the added lateral load measured from the top of the footing. Increase load by this factor This entry will indicate whether you applied a load factor to the above applied load, such as for masonry LRFD or an impact load. The load factor used will be displayed on the report printout. STEM DESIGN TAB
371
Material Use the buttons to select Masonry, Concrete, or Fence. Fence is only allowed on top of the wall, higher than the Retained Height, and is considered weightless. Thickness Use the drop-down list box to input the wall thickness. If masonry is chosen, you will be given standard masonry thickness (e.g. 6", 8", 12"). If concrete is chosen, you can increment in one-inch steps. If Fence is chosen, this entry is unavailable since the fence is assumed to be weightless. Wall Weight This displayed value is based upon the wall data entered earlier. For concrete stems,
Calculation Modules
372
the unit weight of concrete can be specified on the Stem tab. For masonry stems, 140 pcf grout is assumed, and the unit weight of the completed stem is a function of the specified thickness, CMU Type, and the status of the Solid Grouting checkbox, all of which are located on the Stem tab. A multiplier is also available on the Options tab to modify the tabular weights for masonry walls. The industry standard masonry unit weight values used by this module may be modified by clicking Databases > Concrete Masonry Unit Data from the main menu and then clicking the [Change] button. Design Method When a masonry stem section is chosen, this allows a choice of ASD or LRFD methods. When the latter is selected the input notations change (e.g. fs to fy) and all calculations are based upon LRFD. Rebar Size Make your selection from the pull-down menu for bar sizes #3 to #10. Soft Metric sizes will be displayed in parentheses alongside. Rebar Position Chose between Center or Edge. If Center is chosen, the rebar d distance will be 1/2 the actual wall thickness. If Edge is chosen it will be located at the heel side of the stem. For masonry design, the module contains a table of the appropriate "d" values to use for various block sizes and center/edge locations, as shown in the table below. Rebar Position Depth for Masonry, Default Values. Nominal Thickness Rebar Depth (in) Center 6" 8" 10" 12" 14" 16" 2.75" 3.75" 4.75" 5.75" 6.75" 7.75" Edge 2.75" 5.25" 7.25" 9.0" 11.0" 13.0"
For concrete, the edge rebar depth is always stem thickness less 1.5" for #5 and smaller bars (or 2" for #6 or larger), less one-half the bar diameter. Specify Position Box
373
Click this box to change the default "d" value. Fs Enter the allowable steel stress, based on working stress design, which should be used for design of the masonry stem section. The spin button changes this value in increments, and is not visible when a concrete wall has been specified. Short Term Increase This factor is applied to masonry ASD design and allowable soil bearing as permitted by IBC 2009, section 1806.1, and ACI 530-08, section 2.1.2.3. This is applicable only when wind and/or seismic is applied. Solid Grout This applies to masonry only. If this box is checked, the weight of the wall will be based upon industry standard solid-grout weight for either lightweight, medium weight, or normal weight block regardless of the specified spacing of reinforcing. If this box is not checked, the module will calculate the weight based on the assumption that only cells containing reinforcing are grouted. This also affects equivalent solid thickness for stem shear calculations, and area for axial stress calculations (combined with moment for masonry stems). Modular "n", Ratio This is the multiplier used to calculate the modulus of elasticity of masonry. The ACI 530-05 and ACI 530-08 both specify Em = 900*fm which is the default value. The multiplier can be modified on the Options tab. Equivalent Solid Thickness If partially grouted (not solid grout), this value is generated from an internal database that is accessible by clicking Database > Concrete Masonry Unit Data. Stem Design Heights IMPORTANT! The term Stem Design Height used in this module is the height above the top of the footing (i.e. above the base of the stem). It is the height above the bottom of the stem where you want the module to compute moments and shears. You can divide the stem into up to five sections (increments of height). Each section represents either a different material (concrete, masonry, or fence), a change in thickness, or a change in reinforcing size or spacing. For most walls, only two or three changes in stem sections are used. For example, it would be logical to create a change of section at the top of the dowels projecting into the stem from the footing and perhaps another change in section further up the wall where a more economical design is desired. Bottom You must start the stem design here, at the base (height above footing = 0.00), where the stem moment and shear are maximum. As you manipulate the bar sizes, spacing, and position (you first, of course, will have selected a wall material and trial thickness) until the Summary box shows you an acceptable stress ratio (the higher
Calculation Modules
374
and closer to 1.0, the more efficient). To check the wall at a higher Design Height, such as at least the LAP REQD IF ABOVE distance, where reinforcing or thickness can be reduced, click the [Insert Stem] button and enter the next higher section. Advance the spin button to the desired height above the top of the footing or enter it by typing. This will move (and dim) the Bottom Section and you can now design this new section. Continue this way, clicking [Insert Stem] button after each stem section design is completed, up to a maximum of five heights. A new Design Height should only be entered when you want to change the material, thickness, or reinforcing, and should never be less than about two foot intervals.
375
FOOTING TAB
Calculation Modules
376
Toe Width This is the width of the Toe of the footing, and is measured from the front edge of the footing to the front face of the stem. Can be set to 0.00 for a property line condition. All overturning and resisting moments are taken about the bottom-front edge of the toe. Heel Width Distance from front face of stem to back of heel projection. If a dimension is entered that is less than the stem width at the base, the module will automatically reset the heel dimension to at least the stem width. For a property line at the rear face of the stem, this dimension would be the stem width.
377
Total Width The calculated width of the footing, Toe Width + Heel Width. Thickness Total footing thickness, NOT including the key depth (if used). For bending and shear design of the footing, the rebar depth "d" is taken as Footing Depth - Rebar Cover - " (to account for the rebar radius). If footing thickness is inadequate for shear capacity a red warning indicator will appear. The footing thickness must be sufficient to allow for rebar development (for hooked dowels) plus rebar cover (adjacent to the soil). If you enter a dimension less than required for stem bar development, a red message will appear at the top of the screen. If the thickness is inadequate, increase the footing thickness, or change the stem dowels, until this message disappears. f'c Enter concrete compressive stress for footing. Fy Allowable rebar yield stress to be used for design of footing bending reinforcement. Footing Density This option is necessary since, if there is any buoyancy effect, it will reduce the effective weight of the footing concrete. Min "As" Ratio Enter the absolute minimum steel percentage to be used to calculate rebar spacing requirements (commonly 0.0018 Ag for Fy=60,000 psi, but code applicability for footings is arguable). If the % steel required by stress analysis is less that 200/Fy, the minimum of (200/Fy or 1.333 * bending percentage required) is calculated and compared with the Minimum As% entered here, and the greater of the two is used to calculate rebar spacing requirements. Key Depth Depth of the key below the bottom of footing. The bottom of the key is used as the lower horizontal plane for determining the size of the passive pressure block from the soil in front of the footing. Adjust this depth so the sliding safety factor is acceptable (typically a value of 1.5 is used). Key Width Width of the key, measured along the same direction as the footing width. This is usually 12"-14", but generally not less than one-half the key depth so flexural stress in the key is usually minimal. Key Location Enter the distance from the front edge of the toe to the beginning of the key. Do not enter a distance greater than the footing width minus key width.
Calculation Modules
378
Sliding Resistance Method Enter whether sliding resistance will be by friction and passive pressure or by cohesion and passive pressure. Soil over toe to neglect Since the soil over the toe of the footing may be loose and uncompacted, it may have little or no passive resistance. This entry gives you the option of neglecting any or all of the Height of Soil Over Toe that you entered in the Criteria tab. You can neglect the soil over toe plus the footing thickness, if desired. Ftg/Soil Friction Ratio Enter the friction factor here. It is generally provided by the geotechnical engineer and usually varies from 0.25 to 0.45. % FRICTION Usable for Sliding Resistance This may be a stated restriction in the geotechnical report. Enter a value from zero to 100%. % PASSIVE Usable for Sliding Resistance This may be a stated restriction in the geotechnical report. Enter a value from zero to 100% Lateral Forces at Base of Footing This is the total lateral force against the stem and footing which causes the wall to slide and which must be resisted. It is the total active pressure on the heel side less the active pressure on the toe side. less Passive Pressure Force This uses the allowable passive pressure in pcf times the available depth (footing thickness plus soil above toe minus height to neglect) and multiplied by the percent usable that you indicated, to compute the total passive resistance. Weight due to toe surcharge, if applicable, will also be added. If a key is used, the available passive pressure depth will be to the bottom of the key. less Friction Force This is the total vertical reaction multiplied by the friction factor and multiplied by the percent usable that you indicated. Added resisting force required If this is 0.0 lbs., the forces balance, but there may be no safety factor. Watch the Sliding Factor of Safety for an adequate value (usually 1.5). Consider adding a key or revising the footing dimensions if required. Additional force required for a 1.5 Factor of Safety This is the additional resisting force that would be required in order to achieve a 1.5 safety factor. If this value indicates zero, then the sliding factor of safety is already greater than or equal to 1.5.
379
Rebar Cover in Heel & Toe These input fields allow you to specify the clear cover that will be used at the heel and at the toe. When specifying these values, keep in mind that the toe rebar is placed closest to the bottom of the footing, and the heel rebar is placed closest to the top of the footing. When calculating the "d" dimension for bending and shear strength calculations, this module will consider the footing thickness and then deduct the specified clear cover and an additional 1/2" to account for the radius of the rebar. Toe Reinforcing Options This list gives you choices for reinforcing sizes and spacing for the bottom toe bars. Typically the toe bars are extensions of the stem dowels, which are bent out toward the toe. Therefore, it may be most efficient to simply verify that the bar size and spacing used for the stem dowels is within the range of the selections offered for toe reinforcing options. NOTE: If No reinf reqd message appears, it means the flexural capacity of the footing (modulus of rupture times the section modulus, with 2 deducted from the thickness for crack allowance per code) is adequate to resist the applied moment. However, the designer in some cases may consider it prudent to add reinforcing regardless of the theoretical flexural capacity. For plain concrete per ACI 22.5.1, Fr = phi(5)(fc)1/2, where phi = 0.55. Heel Reinforcing Options This list gives you choices for acceptable sizes and spacing of top heel bars. It is desirable to select a spacing that is modular with the stem dowel bars for ease of construction. Note: The module does not calculate the heel bar development length inward from the back face of the stem (where the moment is maximum). NOTE: If No reinf reqd message appears, it means the flexural capacity of the footing (modulus of rupture times the section modulus, with 2 deducted from the thickness for crack allowance per code) is adequate to resist the applied moment. However, the designer in some cases may consider it prudent to add reinforcing regardless of the theoretical flexural capacity. Key Reinforcing Options If flexural tension is insufficient to resist bending in key, a message will appear indicating reinforcing required. You can vary the width of the key until the message disappears. If reinforcing is required options will be shown on the Footing tab. OPTIONS TAB
Calculation Modules
380
Toe Active Pressure Used This drop-down list box provides the option to specify whether the module should or should not apply the toe side horizontal active pressure to reduce the overturning moment and sliding force to be resisted. Typically this is NEVER used. It was added to assist in cases where the footing was buried very deeply in soil. Slab is Present to Resist all Sliding Forces Check this box when a slab is in front of the wall to resist lateral sliding. When this box is checked, sliding is not a design issue passive and friction resistance are ignored -- but the lateral sliding force is displayed for checking the resistance offered by the slab. The slab is assumed to be at the top of the footing not higher, so selecting this checkbox will not reduce the design shear or moment in the stem. Choices for Use of Vertical Component of Active Pressure The vertical component of the lateral pressure is applied at a vertical plane at the back of the heel. You can choose whether or not to use this force to resist overturning, to resist sliding, and to reduce soil bearing pressure. If you choose the option to use this force to resist overturning, then for a level backfill,
381
the module will back-solve the EFP method to find the equivalent internal friction angle, and then apply this vertical component equal to tan. If either the Rankine or Coulomb method had been chosen, this vertical component would be tangent of . If you choose the option to use this force to resist sliding, then the sliding calculation will incorporate the additional frictional force that can be generated as a result of the additional vertical force. If you choose the option named "Soil Bearing Pressure", then the the effect of this vertical component at the back of the heel will be considered in the calculation of the soil bearing pressures.
Factor Applied to Masonry f'm for Calculation of Em The modulus of elasticity for masonry is 900 times f'm per ACI 530-05. This field allows you to enter a multiplier of other than 900 if necessary. Multiplier Applied to CMU Weight from Tables This entry allows you to increase or decrease the internal default values of CMU weights, as displayed on the Stem tab.
Load Factors For each type of load (DL, LL, etc) the default factor will be displayed. You can change them and set new defaults, but remember to review them for a new design since they may have been changed. RESULTS TAB
Calculation Modules
382
Stability Ratios These are displayed for both overturning and sliding. Soil Pressure @ Toe and Heel This is the resulting unfactored soil pressure for both the toe and heel. If the eccentricity is outside the middle third, the heel pressure will show 0.00. (Note: when the resultant is outside the middle-third, the module calculates the toe pressure assuming no tension at heel). Allowable Soil Pressure
383
This is for your reference as input on the Criteria tab. Total Bearing Load This is the sum of all vertical forces. Resultant Eccentricity Distance from center of footing to resultant soil pressure. Eccentricity Within/Outside Middle Third The resultant is outside the middle third of the footing width if the eccentricity is greater than one-sixth the footing width. (If outside the middle third, the module computes the toe soil pressure assuming no tension at heel.) ACI Factored Soil Pressure @ Toe and Heel Load factors are applied to all dead and live loads to determine total vertical load for soil pressure used in calculating footing moments and shears. This load is then applied at the same eccentricity calculated for service load soil pressures to yield the actual factored soil pressures for footing design using ultimate strength design principles. Note that since only factored vertical loads are applied at the non-factored resultant eccentricity, a true 1.6 load factor applied to lateral earth pressure is not used for footing design. If resultant vertical load eccentricity were to be calculated using factored loads, the distance would not truly represent a correct state of stress in the soil. ACI load factors are intended to give conservative results for stress. Calculation of a factored load eccentricity would give soil pressure diagrams that would not always represent the actual soil pressure distribution under the footing, and yield unreasonable results. Factored lateral earth pressure, however, is always used for concrete stem design. Mu Design @ Toe/Heel These are the factored (by 1.2) moments at face of stem for toe and heel moments. Since neither can be greater than the stem base moment (factored if concrete stem), the latter may govern. These moments will be reduced if you choose to neglect the upward soil pressure on the Options tab. A message will indicate which controls. Shear @ Toe and Heel The actual shear is calculated from the one-way action in the footing at a distance "d" (footing thickness - rebar cover) from the toe side of the bottom stem section, and at the face of the stem on the heel side. If "d" is greater than the projecting toe or heel length, then the one-way shear is zero. Allowable Footing Shear The allowable unit shear equals (0.75 * 2 * f'c ). RSM - RESISTING MOMENTS TAB
Calculation Modules
384
This screen presents in tabular form each component contributing to resisting moment, giving weights and lever arms from the front edge of the toe to the centroid of the weight. For calculating the vertical component, if checked on the OPTIONS screen, and if the EFP method was chosen, the module will back-solve using the Rankine formula to obtain an equivalent internal friction angle. The force and moment displayed at the bottom accounts for deduction of effect of vertical component, if box on Options tab has been checked.
385
OTM - OVERTURNING MOMENTS TAB
This screen presents in tabular form each component acting horizontally to overturn the wall/footing system. The centroid of each force is multiplied by its distance up from the bottom of the footing. The Heel Active Pressure includes the effect of surcharges and water table, if applicable, and its Distance is to the centroid of the total lateral force. The total overturning moment is displayed, along with the Resisting/Overturning ratio.
Calculation Modules
386
The overturning moment is reduced by the toe side active pressure, if this option is selected on the Options tab. SLIDING TAB
STEM TAB
387
SKETCH TAB
Calculation Modules
388
LOADING TAB
389
Calculation Modules
390
10.4.2 Concrete Slender Wall

This program provides analysis of concrete wall panels that stand vertically and have applied vertical and out-of-plane lateral loads. The wall panel is analyzed using strength design procedures. Out-of-plane moments within the wall are created by eccentric axial loads, applied lateral loads, lateral self weight loads and moments induced due to the wall weight acting at an eccentricity when it deflects (P_Delta moments). The ACI slender wall procedure, introduced in ACI 318-99, was first adopted by the IBC 2000 and subsequent code editions. As quoted in ACI 318R-05 Commentary, Section 14.8 is based on the corresponding requirements in 1997 UBC and experimental research presented in the 1982 "Test Report by SCCACI-SEAOSC". Analytical study of the current IBC/ACI provisions for concrete wall panels showed the ACI procedure does not correspond to a bilinear load-deflection characteristic observed in the SEAOSC tests and significantly underestimates the service load deflection. The ENERCALC Concrete Slender Wall program uses basic principles of structural mechanics to model the wall as a series of beam segments. For each segment the actual moment is used to calculate member stiffness using the Ief f ectiv e equations developed by Peter H. Bischoff. Since these changes to wall stiffness affect the wall deflection profile, the program performs an iterative analysis of calculating moments (including P-Delta effects). The results are deflection curves almost exactly matching the SCCACI-SEAOSC test results. This makes this program far more accurate at calculating wall deflections and P-Delta effects than the simple equations in the ACI code.
Capabilities This module provides these capabilities: One or two story slender tilt-up concrete walls Optional parapet Axial loads with optional eccentricities Wind, seismic and user defined lateral loads creating bending on the wall panel Variable strip with to model the wall panel Rebar location at center of wall or two layers of reinforcing at each side Temperature differential can be specified across thickness of wall to add curvature Bottom of wall can be fixed or pinned for moment resistance Top of wall can be pinned or free A reveal can be defined and cross section properties modified for reduced thickness and optionally add rebar The effects of wall openings can be addressed by modeling the solid panel between or adjacent to openings and then using superposition to apply the loads above and below openings.
391
General Tab
Material Properties f'c 28-day compressive strength of the concrete. Fy Yield point stress of reinforcing Fr Modulus of rupture for the concrete. ACI has specified either 5 or 7.5 * sqrt(f'c).
Calculation Modules
392
Ec Enter modulus of elasticity of concrete. You can enter the value or click the ["57"] button to set Ec = 57000 * sqrt(f'c), or click the ["33"] button to set Ec = 33 * sqrt(f'c) * ConcWeight1.5. Concrete Wt Weight of concrete in pounds per cubic foot. Max % of Rho Balanced This value sets the maximum percentage of reinforcing the module will allow without giving a warning message. Enter this as a value less than 1.0 which will be applied to the reinforcing area calculated for a balanced section to determine the maximum allowable. Max Pu/Ag = f'c * <entry> Enter a multiplier less than 1.0 which will be applied to f'c to determine the maximum allowable factored axial stress. Ise stiffness reduction factor per ACI R10.12.3 Please see the code reference for an explanation of this factor. It is typically not used in this module because it is a calibration factor used to curve fit deflection calculations with ACI approximate formulas.
Thickness & Rebar Wall Thickness Total wall thickness Bar Location You can select bar placement at the center of the wall thickness or at each face. When selecting "Bar Each Face" the module performs calculations considering both bars. It does not ignore compression in the bars. Rebar "d" Distance Enter the distance between the outside surface of the wall to the centerline of the rebar. For bars each face this measurement can be from either face. Wall Weight The internally calculated wall weight considering the concrete weight and wall thickness entered. Rebar [Spacing] / [# in Width] These two options indicate how you will specify the rebar quantity in your design strip. [Spacing] will change the entry so that you can enter a spacing in inches for the rebar.
393
[# in Width] changes the entry so you can enter the number of bars in your design strip. The width of the design strip is entered on the Dimensions tab. Bar Size Enter the US customary rebar size number.
Analysis Settings P-Delta Deflection Method The module always performs an iterative analysis for moments and deflections using progressively greater wall deflections due to increasing P-Delta effects. Temperature Differential across thickness This input is used to describe the temperature change between each face of the wall. A temperature change induces a slight curvature into the wall because the hotter side expands, resulting in a slightly higher out-of-plane deflection. Enter temperature differentials as positive values. The effects of a specified temperature differential are always additive with the bending and deflection resulting from other applied loads. Minimum Vertical Steel: %/100 Minimum steel percentage as a portion of the gross wall area. Minimum Out-of-Plane Deflection Ratio This setting establishes the minimum allowable ratio of span length to service load deflection. If a lower actual Span/Deflection ratio occurs (meaning greater deflection), a warning message will be displayed. Number of wall elements for FE solver to use This module divides the wall design strip into segments from the base to the top for analysis purposes. Use this entry to define the number of segments to use. Experience demonstrates that approximately 30 segments gives a good balance between the iterative P-Delta analysis reaching convergence and excessive calculation time.
Dimensions Tab
Calculation Modules
394
Fixity Conditions Controls how the top and bottom of the wall are restrained for moments and lateral movement. [Top & Bottom Pinned] Base of wall is restrained against movement out of plane and vertically, rotates freely. Top of wall restrained against out of plane movement and can move vertically and rotate freely. [Top Pinned, Bottom Fixed] Base of wall is restrained against movement about all three axes. Any lateral loading will create a moment at the bottom of the wall, which is not designed in this module. Top of wall restrained against out of plane movement and can move vertically and rotate freely. [Top Free, Bottom Fixed] Base of wall is restrained against movement about all three axes. Any lateral loading will create a moment at the bottom of the wall, which is not designed in this module. Top of wall is completely free making this a cantilevered wall. Clear Height Span of the wall between the base and the first lateral support. For one story walls this is the top support. For 2 story walls this prompt will change to be "1st story height". Parapet Height Distance the wall extends (without a topmost lateral support) above the topmost lateral support (i.e. extension above the clear height for one story wall, extension above the 2nd story height for 2 story walls). Initial Lateral Displacement @ Roof Attachment You may use this entry to specify an initial movement of the top support laterally with respect to the bottom support. Limit this values to 4 inches. This value affects the PDelta moments because of the additional offset of the wall.
395
Reveal Data A reveal is a portion of the wall that is recessed from the rest of the surface. It is formed by placing thin blockout material (typically styrofoam) in the forms prior to concrete placement. It is used to create architectural effects. The reveal reduces the structural thickness of the wall. This module calculates section properties for this reduced section in the portion of the wall where the reveal has been formed. Reveal Depth Depth of reveal measured from outside face of wall. A 1" reveal in a 6" wall gives a net structural thickness of 5". Reveal Start Location, Reveal End Location Distances measured upwards from bottom of wall that define the start and end points of the reveal. Reveal Rebar This selection defines how the module should consider the reveal area to be reinforced. No Change means that the reinforcing stays where it is as defined by the "Rebar 'd' Distance" entered on the General tab. This option results in an offset rebar location within the remaining structural thickness, because the reveal takes away part of the concrete. Drape Bars tells the module to move the rebar inward to give the same dimension between the rebar and face of wall. For walls with bars at "Center" this moves the bar to the center of the remaining structural thickness. When bars are specified on each face, this option moves only one of the bars inwards. Add Bars enables you to add additional reinforcing in the area of the reveal. The location of the main rebar is as described in the "No Change" option above. Strip Width: Width of wall portion for analysis This module performs its analysis for this width. Results are for either this width or a 12" width as noted where the results are provided. Note that applied loads either are applied to the entire strip width (as for concentrated vertical and lateral loads) or are entered on a per-foot basis when they are uniform loads. Two Story... When a two story wall is selected, this tab changes slightly to provide the 2nd story height and remove the Fixed-Free support option.
Calculation Modules
396
1st Story Height Distance from the bottom of the wall to the first lateral support. 2nd Story Height Distance from the first lateral support to the top lateral support. Initial Lateral Displacement @ 2nd Floor Attachment You may use this entry to specify an initial movement of the 2nd story support laterally with respect to the bottom support. Limit this values to 4 inches. This value effects the P-Delta moments because of the additional offset of the wall.
Loads Tab - Vertical Loads A variety of vertical loads are available. Note the hint in green describing whether the load is per foot or on the entire strip width. Enter all loads as service level loads, meaning the load intensity is calculated using all code provisions EXCEPT load factors used for LRFD or ASD.
Ledger Load This is a per-foot vertical load applied to the wall at an optional eccentricity. So if you
397
have a 48" strip width and specify a 1 k/ft dead load then the strip will have a total of 4 kip applied due to the 1 k/ft entry. Eccentricity Describes an offset from the mid-thickness of the wall panel, which is the default location of application of a vertical load. Enter this value as a positive number when the load is shifted toward the inside of the wall. Concentric Load This is a per-foot vertical load applied concentrically to the wall. So if you have a 48" strip width and specify a 1 k/ft dead load then the strip will have a total of 4 kip applied due to the 1 k/ft entry. Mid-Height Vertical Uniform Load This load entry is only shown for 2-story walls. It allows you to specify two uniform loads applied at the "1st Story" height, one of which can have an eccentricity from the wall center. Concentrated Loads This is a single concentrated vertical load applied to the wall "strip width" with an optional eccentricity. Because applied concentrated loads spread out as the distance from point of application we offer you a way to define how this concentrated load will spread out as you move from the point of application to the base of the wall. This is useful because the intensity of compressive force affects the moment capacity of the wall (similar to the effect described by a column interaction diagram). Distance from Base is the height at which the load is applied. Bearing Width is the length along which the load is applied to the strip. A 1 kip load on a 12" bearing width with a 6" wall will result in a 13.88 psi load at the point of bearing. Base Width is the width that the load spreads out to at the bottom of the wall. A 1 kip load with a 48" base width and a 6" wall will result in a 1000/(48 * 6) = 3.47 psi load at the base of the wall.
Loads Tab - Lateral Loads Lateral loads are applied perpendicular to the plane of the wall and are almost always seismic or wind. These loads create out of plane deflection of the wall, which the module will use to develop P-Delta effects to calculate secondary moments in the wall. Recall that this module divides the wall into small segments and calculates the allowable and actual forces and deflections for each small segment. In this way the lateral loads are properly modeled on what is effectively a beam with variable stiffness due to the state of cracking in each segment.
Calculation Modules
398
Enter all loads as service level loads, meaning the load intensity is calculated using all code provisions EXCEPT load factors used for LRFD or ASD.
Full area WIND Load Enter the wind load that will be applied to the wall in the out-of-plane direction. This load will only be applied to one surface of the wall, and as such, the magnitude must take into consideration both the internal and external pressures. For the purpose of defining the direction of applied wind pressures, consider that pressure will only be applied to the exterior surface of the wall. A net pressure that acts TOWARD the exterior surface of the wall should be entered as a positive value. A net pressure that acts AWAY FROM the exterior surface of the wall should be entered as a negative value. Wall Weight SEISMIC Load This section offers three options to specify the seismic load that will be applied to the wall in the out-of-plane direction: Enter Lateral Load: This entry is a simple net load applied to the wall (but will still be factored by the load combination factors for "E").
Enter Wall Weight Factor: Enter a number that will be multiplied by the self-weight of the wall. For example, if you enter 0.25 and the wall weighs 80 psf, then a 20.00 psf out-of-plane load will be calculated and applied to the wall using the load combination factors for "E".
Enter SDS per ASCE-05: Enter the (SDS * I) value as prescribed by the ASCE code for
399
the building location. The minimum calculated load value of 10 psf or (0.4 * Value Entered * Wall Weight) will be applied to the wall using the load combination factors for "E".
Fp This is the actual seismic load applied perpendicular to the plane of the wall, which represents the wall's seismic self weight load. Concentrated Lateral Loads This is an added lateral load applied perpendicular to the plane of the wall. It acts on the full "Strip Width" and is factored by the load combination factors corresponding to the type of load. Distributed Lateral Loads This is an added lateral uniform load applied out-of-plane to the wall. It acts on the full "Strip Width" and is factored by the load combination factors corresponding to the type of load. You also enter the start and end distance of the load extent above the base of the wall.
Load Combinations Tab Typical load combination information as used throughout the Structural Engineering Library.
Summary Tab This tab presents the critical results as calculated by the module.
Calculation Modules
400
Maximum Bending Stress Ratio The module looks at the detailed results for ALL strength design load combinations at all "segments" in the wall and pulls out the maximum factored load bending stress ratio to present here as the governing condition. Minimum Deflection Ratio The module looks at the detailed results for ALL service load combinations at all "segments" in the wall and pulls out the minimum service load deflection ratio (meaning maximum deflection) to present here as the governing condition. Moment Capacity Check For the condition of maximum bending stress ratio, the actual applied and allowable bending moments are given along with the governing load combination. Service Deflection Check For the condition of minimum deflection ratio (meaning maximum deflection) the ratio, deflection, allowable minimum ratio, allowable deflection (based on allowable ratio) and governing load combination are reported. Axial Load Check The module checks the actual axial stress in all segments for all load combinations and gives the maximum actual stress Pu/Ag. The allowable value is the result of the user's entry for maximum percentage of f'c to use. Reinforcing Limit Check The module checks all portions of the wall for reinforcing (including differently reinforced first and second stories and reveal areas). It reports the maximum reinforcing ratio and compares it with the maximum percentage of balanced section analysis As allowed. Minimum Moment Check ACI specifies that a wall section in bending shall have a minimum strength Mn that is greater than the cracking strength Mcr = Sgross * Fr. Maximum Reactions This gives a summary of the maximum reactions (both out-of-plane and vertical)
401
along with the load combination that creates them.
Maximum Combinations Tab This tab provides a summary of the governing values for each load combination for both factored load axial & bending and service load deflections. Factored Load Maximum Moments for Load Combinations: The module looks through the result set for each load combination and identifies the location above the base of the wall at which the maximum condition is found. Note that "Aseff" is the effective area of steel and is influenced by the axial compression in that segment. Service Load Maximum Deflections for Load Combinations: The module looks through the result set for each load combination and identifies the location above the base of the wall at which the maximum out-of-plane deflection is found. The value for "Ieff" is specific to the segment at that location and is based on the actual moment and Bischoff's equation for calculating effective moment of inertia.
Strength Design Results Tab This tab provides an extremely detailed summary of the factored axial load, moments, effective steel area and moment of inertia at each wall analysis segment for each load combination.
Calculation Modules
402
Service Load Deflections Tab This tab provides an extremely detailed summary of the service axial load, moments, effective moment of inertia and calculated deflection at each wall analysis segment for each load combination.
Reactions Tab This tab gives a summary of out-of-plane and vertical base reactions for each service load combination.
Notes Tab Included are some excerpts from ACI regarding slender concrete wall design.
403
Sketch Tab
Diagram Tab
Calculation Modules
404
10.4.3 Masonry Slender Wall

This module provides design and analysis according to the new provisions for design of masonry walls, using the P-Delta deflection considerations now included in the IBC. This method lifts the restriction on H/t ratios, and performs wall analysis using the principles of ultimate strength design. The design method is very similar to that of the Concrete Slender Wall module. This module uses a variable width strip of wall section to represent a typical section of wall. The module has the ability to apply a lateral wind load, seismic load, partial length uniform lateral load, and a lateral point load to the clear span of the wall section. This variety of loadings should take care of almost every lateral loading case possible. The user may specify masonry and reinforcing strengths, seismic factor, wind load, vertical and lateral loads, vertical load eccentricities, and wall construction. The module determines the wall capacity, actual deflections considering P-Delta effects, and solves for the final moments obtained through iteration of the P-Delta effects. Deflection analysis is provided for both service and factored load cases. The user reaches a final design by modifying wall thickness, rebar size, and rebar spacing until no overstress condition exists and the deflection limits prescribed in the code are satisfied. This module uses basic principles of structural mechanics to model the wall as a series of beam segments. For each segment the actual moment is used to calculate member stiffness using the Ief f ectiv e equations developed by Peter H. Bischoff. Since these changes to wall stiffness affect the wall deflection profile, the program performs an iterative analysis of calculating moments (including P-Delta effects). The results are deflection curves almost exactly matching the SCCACI-SEAOSC test results. This makes this module far more accurate at calculating wall deflections and P-Delta effects than the simple equations in the ACI code. Capabilities This module provides these capabilities: One or two story slender masonry walls Optional parapet Axial loads with optional eccentricities Wind, seismic and user defined lateral loads creating bending on the wall panel Variable strip width to model the wall panel Temperature differential can be specified across thickness of wall to add curvature
405
General Tab
Material Properties f'm Enter the allowable masonry strength to be used in the analysis. The allowable bending and axial stresses calculated from f'm are outlined in a later section. fy Yield point stress of reinforcing. fr - Rupture & Fr-Table
Calculation Modules
406
Modulus of rupture for the masonry wall system. Em = f'm * [value] The modulus of elasticity of the masonry wall system is specified by this value acting as a multiplier to f'm. Max % of Rho Balanced This value sets the maximum percentage of reinforcing the module will allow without giving a warning message. Enter this as a value less than 1.0 which will be applied to the reinforcing area calculated for a balanced section to determine the maximum allowable reinforcing ratio. Grout Density Choose from two different options for the density of the grout. Block Weight Select light, medium and normal weight block. The weight of a completed wall is determined from the masonry database, depending on the block weight, grout density, and grouted cell spacing. To view the database values click Databases > Concrete Masonry Unit Data from the main menu. Here is what you will see:
Thickness & Rebar Nominal Thickness Select the nominal thickness for the concrete masonry units used in the wall construction. This selection will pull the values for wall weight, equivalent solid thickness and Igross from the masonry database (see above). Actual Thickness The actual wall thickness for the nominal selection. Rebar Size & Spacing Enter the rebar size and spacing.
407
Rebar "d" Distance Enter the distance from the extreme compression fiber to the center of the rebar. Solid Grouted Select this checkbox if the wall is to be grouted solid . If unchecked the module will calculate the wall weight considering that grouted cells only occur at the spacing of the reinforcing. Wall Weight Weight of wall as retrieved from the masonry database. Value is based on specified wall thickness, grout density, block type, and grouting frequency.
Analysis Settings P-Delta Deflection Method The module always performs an iterative analysis for moments and deflections using progressively greater wall deflections due to increasing P-Delta effects. Temperature Differential across thickness This input is used to describe the temperature change between each face of the wall. A temperature change induces a slight curvature into the wall because the hotter side expands, resulting in a slightly higher out-of-plane deflection. Enter temperature differentials as positive values. The effects of a specified temperature differential are always additive with the bending and deflection resulting from other applied loads. Minimum Vertical Steel: %/100 Minimum steel percentage as a portion of the gross wall area. Minimum Out-of-Plane Deflection Ratio This setting establishes the minimum allowable ratio of span length to service load deflection. If a lower actual Span/Deflection ratio occurs (meaning greater deflection), a warning message will be displayed. Number of wall elements for FE solver to use This module divides the wall design strip into segments from the base to the top for analysis purposes. Use this entry to define the number of segments to use. Experience demonstrates that approximately 30 segments gives a good balance between the iterative P-Delta analysis reaching convergence and excessive calculation time.
Dimensions Tab
Calculation Modules
408
Fixity Conditions Controls how the top and bottom of the wall are restrained for moments and lateral movement. [Top & Bottom Pinned] Base of wall is restrained against movement out of plane and vertically, rotates freely. Top of wall restrained against out of plane movement and can move vertically and rotate freely. [Top Pinned, Bottom Fixed] Base of wall is restrained against movement about all three axes. Any lateral loading will create a moment at the bottom of the wall which is not designed in this module. Top of wall restrained against out of plane movement and can move vertically and rotate freely. [Top Free, Bottom Fixed] Base of wall is restrained against movement about all three axes. Any lateral loading will create a moment at the bottom of the wall which is not designed in this module. Top of wall is completely free making this a cantilevered wall. Clear Height Span of the wall between the base and the first lateral support. For one story walls this is the top support. For 2 story walls this is this prompt will change to be "1st story height". Parapet Height Distance the wall extends (without a topmost lateral support) above the topmost lateral support (clear height for one story wall, 2nd story height for 2 story walls) Initial Lateral Displacement @ Roof Attachment You may use this entry to specify an initial movement of the top support laterally with respect to the bottom support. Limit this values to 4 inches. This value effects the PDelta moments because of the additional offset of the wall. Reveal Data
409
A reveal is a portion of the wall that is recessed from the rest of the surface. It is formed by placing thin blockout material (typically styrofoam) in the forms prior to concrete placement. It is used to create architectural effects. The reveal reduces the structural thickness of the wall. This module calculates section properties for this reduced section in the portion of the wall where the reveal has been formed. Reveal Depth Depth of reveal measured from outside face of wall. A 1" reveal in a 6" wall gives a net structural thickness of 5". Reveal Start Location, Reveal End Location Distances measured upwards from bottom of wall that define the start and end points of the reveal. Strip Width: Width of wall portion for analysis This module performs its analysis for this width. Results are for either for this width or a 12" width as noted where the results are provided. Note that applied loads either are applied to the entire strip width (as for concentrated vertical and lateral loads) or are entered on a per-foot basis when they are uniform loads. Two Story... When a two story wall is selected this tab changes slightly to provide the 2nd story height and remove the Fixed-Free support option.
1st Story Height Distance from the bottom of the wall to the first lateral support. 2nd Story Height Distance from the first lateral support to the top lateral support. Initial Lateral Displacement @ 2nd Floor Attachment You may use this entry to specify an initial movement of the 2nd story support laterally with respect to the bottom support. Limit this values to 4 inches. This value effects the P-Delta moments because of the additional offset of the wall.
Calculation Modules
410
Loads Tab - Vertical Loads A variety of vertical loads are available. Note the hint in green describing whether the load is per foot or on the entire strip width. Enter all loads as service level loads, meaning the load intensity is calculated using all code provisions EXCEPT load factors used for LRFD or ASD.
Ledger Load This is a per-foot vertical load applied to the wall at an optional eccentricity. So if you have a 48" strip width and specify a 1 k/ft dead load then the strip will have a total of 4 kip applied due to the 1 k/ft entry. Concentric Load This is a per-foot vertical load applied concentrically to the wall. So if you have a 48" strip width and specify a 1 k/ft dead load then the strip will have a total of 4 kip applied due to the 1 k/ft entry. Mid-Height Vertical Uniform Load This load entry is only shown for 2-story walls. It allows you to specify two uniform loads applied at the "1st Story" height, one of which can have an eccentricity from the wall center. Concentrated Loads These are single concentrated vertical loads applied to the wall "strip width" with an optional eccentricity. Because applied concentrated loads spread out as the distance from point of application increases, we offer you a way to define how these concentrated loads will spread out as you move from the point of application to the base of the wall. This is useful because the intensity of compressive force affects the moment capacity of the wall (think column interaction diagram). Distance from Base is the height at which the load is applied.
411
Bearing Width is the length along which the load is applied to the strip. A 1 kip load on a 12" bearing width with a 6" wall will result in a 13.88 psi load at the point of bearing. Base Width is the width that the load spreads out to at the bottom of the wall. A 1 kip loads with a 48" base width and a 6" wall will result in a 1000/(48 * 6) = 3.47 psi load at the base of the wall. Eccentricity Describes an offset from the mid-thickness of the wall panel, which is the default location of application of a vertical load. Enter this value as a positive number when the load is shifted toward the inside of the wall. Loads Tab - Lateral Loads Lateral loads are applied perpendicular to the plane of the wall and are almost always seismic or wind. These loads create out-of-plane deflection of the wall, which the module will use to develop P-Delta effects to calculate secondary moments in the wall. Recall from other explanations that the module divides the wall into small segments and calculates the allowable and actual forces and deflections for each small segment. In this way the lateral loads are properly modeled on what is a beam with variable stiffness due to the state of cracking in each segment. Enter all loads as service level loads, meaning the load intensity is calculated using all code provisions EXCEPT load factors used for LRFD or ASD.
Full area WIND Load Enter the wind load that will be applied to the wall in the out-of-plane direction. This load will only be applied to one surface of the wall, and as such, the magnitude must take into consideration both the internal and external pressures. For the purpose of defining the direction of applied wind pressures, consider that pressure will only be applied to the exterior surface of the wall. A net pressure that acts TOWARD the exterior surface of the wall should be entered as a positive value. A net pressure that acts AWAY FROM the exterior surface of the wall should be
Calculation Modules
412
entered as a negative value. Wall weight seismic load This section offers three options to specify the seismic load that will be internally applied to the wall in the out-of-plane direction: Enter Lateral Load: This entry is a simple net load applied to the wall (but will still be factored by the load combination factors for "E").
Enter Wall Weight Factor: Enter a number that will be multiplied by the self-weight of the wall. For example, if you enter 0.25 and the wall weighs 80 psf, then a 20.00 psf out-of-plane load will be calculated and applied to the wall using the load combination factors for "E".
Enter SDS per ASCE-05: Enter the (SDS * I) value as prescribed by the ASCE code for the building location. The minimum calculated load value of 10 psf or (0.4 * Value Entered * Wall Weight) will be applied to the wall using the load combination factors for "E".
Fp This is the actual seismic load applied perpendicular to the plane of the wall, which represents the wall's seismic self weight load. Concentrated Lateral Loads This is an added lateral load applied perpendicular to the plane of the wall. It acts on the full "Strip Width" and is factored by the load combination factors corresponding to the type of load. Distributed Lateral Loads This is an added lateral uniform load applied perpendicular to the plane of the wall. It acts on the full "Strip Width" and is factored by the load combination factors corresponding to the type of load. You also enter the start and end distance of the load extent above the base of the wall.
413
Load Combination Tab Typical load combination information as used throughout the Structural Engineering Library.
Results Summary Tab This tab presents the critical results as calculated by the module.
Maximum Bending Stress Ratio The module looks at the detailed results for ALL strength design load combinations at all "segments" in the wall and pulls out the maximum factored load bending stress ratio to present here as the governing condition. Minimum Deflection Ratio The module looks at the detailed results for ALL service load combinations at all "segments" in the wall and pulls out the minimum service load deflection ratio (meaning maximum deflection) to present here as the governing condition. Moment Capacity Check
Calculation Modules
414
For the condition of maximum bending stress ratio, the actual applied and allowable bending moments are given along with the governing load combination. Service Deflection Check For the condition of minimum deflection ratio (meaning maximum deflection) the ratio, deflection, allowable minimum ratio, allowable deflection (based on allowable ratio) and governing load combination are reported. Axial Load Check The module checks the actual axial stress in all segments for all load combinations and gives the maximum actual stress Pu/Ag. The allowable value is the result of the user's entry for maximum percentage of f'm to use. Reinforcing Limit Check The module checks all portions of the wall for reinforcing (including differently reinforced first and second stories and reveal areas) and reports the maximum reinforcing ratio and compares it with the maximum percentage of balanced section analysis As allowed. Minimum Moment Check ACI specifies that a wall section in bending shall have a minimum strength Mn that is greater than the cracking strength Mcr = Sgross * fr. Maximum Reactions This gives a summary of the maximum reactions (both out-of-plane and vertical) along with the load combination that creates them.
Maximum Combinations This tab provides a summary of the governing values for each load combination for both factored load axial & bending and service load deflections. Factored Load Maximum Moments for Load Combinations: The module looks through the result set for each load combination and identifies the location above the base of the wall at which the maximum condition is found. Note that "Aseff" is the effective area of steel and is influenced by the axial compression in that segment. Service Load Maximum Deflections for Load Combinations: The module looks through the result set for each load combination and identifies the location above the base of the wall at which the maximum out-of-plane deflection is found. The value for "Ieff" is specific to the segment at that location and is based on the actual moment and Bischoff's equation for calculating effective moment of inertia.
415
Strength Design Results This tab provides an extremely detailed summary of the factored axial load, moments, effective steel area and moment of inertia at each wall analysis segment for each load combination.
Service Load Deflections This tab provides an extremely detailed summary of the service axial load, moments, effective moment of inertia and calculated deflection at each wall analysis segment for each load combination.
Reactions
Calculation Modules
416
This tab gives a summary of out-of-plane and vertical base reactions for each service load combination.
Notes Included are some excerpts from ACI regarding slender masonry wall design.
Sketch
Diagram
417
Calculation Modules
418
10.5
Shear Walls
Please select a material chapter.
419
10.5.1 Concrete Shear Wall

Need more? Ask Us a Question This module allows you to design concrete shear walls of several physical layouts: 1- Multi-Story wall with no openings but with up to five levels of differing length, height and thickness. 2- Single story wall with openings. Soon to be added will be a concrete solid wall with cast in end columns and also "special boundary elements" per ACI. Also to be added will be masonry and wood shear walls with similar capabilities.
Walls with Openings The ability to specify openings in a rectangular wall is allowed for the Wall with Openings wall type. You have the ability to specify opening locations anywhere you like. The module analyzes the wall and creates piers that divide the wall into rectangular elements. The Sketch tab provides a drawing of the piers that the module has determined from the input data. See below:
Calculation Modules
420
The analysis starts at the top of the wall and moves downwards. Applied loads and wall self weight (if selected) are determined in each pier and the forces and moments are calculated. The module can distribute loads from a single pier above to multiple piers below (or multiple piers at the same level to a single connecting pier) either by proportional rigidity of the piers or by tributary length. The Results tab provides you with a good view of how the load distribution progresses. In the screen capture below note that for the load combination each pier is listed, the proportional shear value for a pier and the applied, self weight and loads from above to that pier are shown.
In the two screen captures above take a look at P4. It will transfer load to piers P6 and P7. Note that the table shows that P6 will take 10.1% of the shear load and P7 will take 89.9% of the shear load. Those values were arrived at from the relative rigidities of P6 and P7. When considering the distribution of vertical loads to piers P6 and P7 in the image above, the load is distributed in proportion to the tributary width from the pier above. For vertical loads, the program arrives at a distribution of 30% to P6 and 70% to P7. General Tab - Multi Story Solid If you wish to design a wall up to five levels high but without openings, click the [MultiStory Solid] button. The tab will change to display the entries shown below:
421
Height specifies the total height of the wall. On the next tab you can divide that total height into up to five different wall portions. Ec is the bending modulus of elasticity and Ev is the shear modulus of elasticity.
General Tab - Wall with Openings When you want to design a solid wall with openings click the [Wall w/ Openings] button:
Length, Height & Thickness define the overall wall dimensions. The length you enter is used for the length of the bottom-most portion of the wall. Within those dimensions you will specify the openings on the next tab labeled Openings. SDS is used to calculate the in-plane portion of the wall weight to be applied as a seismic load. Ec is the bending modulus of elasticity, and Ev is the shear modulus of elasticity. The Default Rebar Size & Spacing are used in the calculated bar requirements when the reinforcing due to shear is less than code minimums.
Calculation Modules
422
Multi-Story Wall Tab This tab is where you specify the distinct wall levels for the multi-story wall.
Analysis Height locates the bottom edge of the wall section and is where the maximum shear and bending stress will be calculated. Wall Offset is the distance that this wall section is offset from the left-most edge of the bottom-most wall section. Wall Length is the length of the wall section. Maximum length is the overall wall length - offset. Wall thickness is the thickness of this wall section. Effective Depth locates the tension rebar in the panel, and is used to calculate "shear depth" for calculation of actual shear stresses
Checkboxes Analysis Height This is the user-defined height at which the analysis of a particular wall section will be performed. All moments, shears, and vertical loads at this height will be calculated using all applied lateral and vertical loads and the wall self weight above this point. The other wall data items specified in the same column will be used between this analysis height and the next higher level indicated in the column to the right. ALWAYS WORK WITH THE HIGHER ANALYSIS HEIGHT IN THE COLUMN TO THE RIGHT OF A LOWER HEIGHT. This is needed due to the manner in which the module calculates the heights by comparing heights of adjacent sections.
423
Total Wall Height Enter the total height of the wall. This height is used by the module to determine the total height that the topmost Analysis Height wall section should extend to for determining the weight of that uppermost section. Wall Offset Please refer to the diagram to further understand this item. Because this module can be used with a walls that have their length changes with height, you must enter the offset from the bottom wall section to the LEFT EDGE of the wall section. This enables the module to calculate the actual X-Distance to the center of gravity of the wall. Wall Length Enter the length to be used in the analysis of the particular wall section. Please note that if the Wall length + Offset is greater than the Wall Length + Offset for the level below, this indicates that the section OVERHANGS the section below it. This is not allowed. Wall Thickness Enter the thickness to be used in the analysis of a particular wall section. This thickness will be used only between the Analysis Height for that section up to the analysis of the next higher section (or Total Wall Height if it is the highest section). d:Effective Depth The module considers the effective shear length of the wall to be 0.8 * wall length. If you leave this entry blank, it will be filled in for you automatically.
Openings Tab - Perforated Wall This tab allows you to enter the wall openings. Openings are defined by the distance of the lower-left corner of the opening from the lower-left corner of the wall. Opening width and height are measured upwards and to the right.
Calculation Modules
424
Use the [Add] and [Edit] buttons to specify the dimensions of the opening. Clicking either button displays this window:
Loads Tab - Multi-Story Wall This main tab has four sub-tabs that allow you to enter four types of loads. Vertical loads can be of dead, live, roof live and snow types. Lateral loads can be of seismic and wind types. Add wall weight to dead loads will tell the module to calculate the weight of the wall above each analysis height and include it in the vertical dead loads to calculate applied axial stress. It also is used for footing design when that option is selected. Add wall weight as SEISMIC load will calculate the wall self weight, apply the lateral weight seismic factor and "E" load combination factor. The resulting load will be applied at the wall center to calculate shear and overturning due to that portion of the wall. This is
425
used for values at the analysis height, for the effect of that level's seismic weight on the levels below, and for footing overturning and sliding calculations. Vertical Point Loads Use this tab to apply point loads to the wall. You can specify an "X" and "Y" distance from the lower-left corner of the lower wall so that the load can be located anywhere on the defined walls.
Use the [Add] and [Edit] buttons to change the values of applied loads. Clicking either button displays this window:
Vertical Uniform Loads Use this tab to apply uniform loads to the wall. You can specify a "Y" distance from the bottom of the lower wall so that the load can be located at any height.
Calculation Modules
426
Lateral Point Loads Use this tab to apply point lateral loads to the wall. You can specify a "Y" distance from the bottom of the lower wall so that the load can be located at any height.
427
Lateral Uniform Loads Use this tab to apply uniform lateral loads to the wall. You can specify a Start and End location to define the extent of the lateral load.
Calculation Modules
428
Loads Tab - Perforated Wall This main tab has four sub-tabs that allow you to enter four types of loads. The module will correctly apply the loads you specify to the portions of wall to which they are applied. Any loads that exist within an opening will be ignored. Vertical loads can be of dead, live, roof live and snow types. Lateral loads can be of seismic and wind types. Add wall weight to dead loads will tell the module to calculate the weight of the wall above each analysis height and include it in the vertical dead loads to calculate applied axial stress. It also is used for footing design then that option is selected. Add wall weight as SEISMIC load will calculate the wall self weight, apply the lateral weight seismic factor and "E" load combination factor. The resulting load will be applied at
429
the wall center to calculate shear and overturning due to that portion of the wall. This is used for values at the analysis height, for the effect for that levels seismic weight on the levels below, and for footing overturning and sliding calculations.
Vertical Point Loads
Vertical Uniform Loads
Lateral Point Loads
Lateral Uniform Loads

Calculation Modules
430
Footing Tab You also have the option to specify a footing under a shear wall by selecting the Specify a Footing checkbox. The dimensions of the footing are specified using Distance @ Left and Distance @ Right. Distance @ Left is the distance that the footing projects past the left edge of the wall (meaning the lower wall level for a multi-story type wall). Distance @ Right is the distance that the footing projects past the right edge of the wall (meaning the lower wall level for a multi-story type wall). Rebar is assumed to exist only at the bottom of the footing to resist tensile forces from the vertical loads and increased pressure due to overturning forces. Tension in the top of the footing in cases where no upward soil pressure exists and the footing weight creates a downward net force IS IGNORED.
Load Combination Tab The typical load combination tab for strength design of concrete is provided.
431
Multi-Story Wall Summary - Stresses Tab For multi-story walls the module provides a summary of each level. In the top portion you will see the calculated shear, moment and axial loads at the analysis height you have specified. These values are due to wall self weight and applied vertical and lateral loads from that analysis height and above. In the bottom portion of the screen, the unit shear stresses, shear steel required and end reinforcing for bending tension in that wall section are reported. All calculations are per ACI.
Multi-Story Wall Summary - Forces Tab This tab provides the detailed force values for each wall level and for each load combination.
Calculation Modules
432
Pier Summary Tab - Wall with Openings When a wall with openings is selected a list of resulting information for each rectangular analysis portion is provided. This table is the condensed results of the Pier Forces tab and shows only the governing load combination values for shear load and reinforcing for each pier.
Pier Forces Tab - Wall with Openings This tab shows the detailed analysis information for each pier. Because piers are numbers from top to bottom of the wall you can roughly see how the loads are transferred downwards. Shear % values are the calculated portion of shear that each pier will receive from the level above based on the stiffness of that pier and others acting in parallel with it. Applied values are the loads that the user has entered that are found to be applicable to that pier given their dimensioned locations. Self Weight values are the calculated self weight of the pier if the user has selected to have the module auto calculate them. From Above values are what is applied to that pier from the pier connected to the top of that pier. Vertical % values are the calculated portion of vertical load that each pier will receive from the pier attached above. This % is based on tributary lengths.
433
Pier Details Tab - Wall with Openings This tab is a simple summary of the module-generated piers and a small sketch of each.
Footing & Stability Tab This tab provides the calculated service and factored load soil pressure, one-way shear and bending at the end of the wall.
Sketch Tab - Multi-Story Solid
Calculation Modules
434
Sketch Tab - Wall with Openings
435
10.6
Foundation
10.6.1 General Footing

This module provides analysis of a rectangular footing with applied axial load, overburden, moment and shear loads. The module allows you to move the axial load application position off-center of the footing, and provides automatic calculation of allowable soil bearing pressure increases based on footing dimensions and/or depth below surface. The module checks service load soil pressure, overturning stability, sliding stability, flexure and shear at each of the four column corners and punching shear around the column perimeter.
General f'c 28-day compressive strength of the concrete. fy Yield point stress of reinforcing.
Calculation Modules
436
Ec Modulus of elasticity of concrete. Concrete Density The density of the concrete is used to calculate the self weight of the pedestal and footing when that option is selected. Phi Values Enter the capacity reduction values to be applied to Vn and Mn. Calculate footing weight & include in soil bearing Click [Yes] to have the module calculate the self weight of the footing and apply it as a downward load when determining soil bearing pressures. The self weight will be multiplied by the dead load factor in each load combination. Calculate footing weight & use to resist sliding, resist overturning and counteract moments & shears Click [Yes] to have the module calculate the self weight of the footing and consider it when determining sliding and overturning factors of safety and when calculating moments and shears. The self weight will be multiplied by the dead load factor in each load combination. Min Steel Ratio - Bending Enter the minimum ratio for bending steel, calculated using the "d" distance from compression edge to rebar centroid. This will trigger a warning message if the section is under-reinforced. Min Steel Ratio - Temperature/Shrinkage Enter the minimum ratio for temperature/shrinkage steel, calculated using the footing thickness. This will also trigger a warning message if the section is under-reinforced. Minimum overturning safety factor Enter the minimum allowable ratio of resisting moment to overturning moment. If the actual ratio is less than the specified minimum ratio, it will trigger a message that overturning stability is not satisfied. Minimum sliding safety factor Enter the minimum allowable ratio of resisting force to sliding force. If the actual ratio is less than the specified minimum ratio, it will trigger a message that sliding stability is not satisfied. Use ACI 10.5 as minimum reinforcing Select this checkbox if the module should check ACI 318-05 equation 10-3 and trigger a warning if that minimum reinforcing is not supplied.
437
Soil Allowable Values Allowable Soil Bearing Enter the allowable soil bearing pressure that the soil can resist. This is a service load resistance and will be compared to calculated service load soil pressures (loads not factored as in strength design). Increase bearing by footing weight Click [Yes] to tell the module to calculate the weight of one square foot (plan view) of footing weight and add it to the allowable soil bearing value. This has the effect of not penalizing the soil for the self weight of the footing, and is useful for situations where the geotechnical engineering report provides allowable net bearing pressures. Soil passive sliding resistance Enter the value of passive soil pressure resistance to sliding. This value will be used to determine a component of sliding resistance that is generated by the passive pressure of the soil. The sliding resistance due to passive pressure is then added to the sliding resistance due to friction to determine the total resistance to sliding for each load combination. Coefficient of Soil/Concrete Friction Enter the coefficient of friction between soil and footing to use in sliding resistance calculations. Soil Bearing Increase This section allows you to specify some dimensions that, when exceeded, will automatically increase the allowable soil bearing pressure. Footing base depth below soil surface: The distance from the bottom of the footing to the top of the soil. This value is used to determine allowable soil bearing pressure increases and soil passive sliding resistance, but it is not used in any other calculations in this module. Increases based on footing depth: Provides a method to automatically apply increases to the basic allowable soil bearing pressure based on footing depth below some reference depth. Collects the following parameters:
Calculation Modules
438
Allowable pressure increase per foot: Specifies the amount that the basic allowable soil bearing pressure can be increased for each foot of depth below some reference depth. When base of footing is below: Specifies the required depth in order to start realizing incremental increases in the allowable soil bearing pressure on the basis of footing depth. Example: Assume the following: Basic Allowable Soil Bearing Pressure = 3 ksf. Footing base is 6'-0" below soil surface. The Geotechnical report specifies that a 0.15 ksf increase in bearing pressure is allowed for each foot of depth when the base is deeper than 4' below top of soil. Since you've indicated that the footing is 6' below the soil surface, the module will automatically calculate the adjusted allowable soil bearing pressure to be 3 ksf + (6' - 4') * 0.15 ksf = 3.30 ksf. Increases based on footing plan dimension: Provides a method to automatically apply increases to the basic allowable soil bearing pressure based on footing dimensions greater than some reference dimension. Collects the following parameters: Allowable pressure increase per foot: Specifies the amount that the basic allowable soil bearing pressure can be increased for each foot of length or width greater than some reference dimension. When maximum length or width is greater than: Specifies the required dimension in order to start realizing incremental increases in the allowable soil bearing pressure on the basis of footing dimension. Example: Assume the following: Basic Allowable Soil Bearing Pressure = 3 ksf. Footing measures 12'-0" x 6'-0". The Geotechnical report specifies that a 0.15 ksf increase in soil bearing pressure is allowed for each foot when the largest plan dimension of the footing is greater than 4'. The module will automatically calculate the adjusted allowable soil bearing pressure to be 3 ksf + (12' - 4') * 0.15 ksf = 4.2 ksf. Note: Increases based on footing depth and plan dimensions are cumulative.
439
Footing Dimensions This tab is where you enter the footing and pedestal dimensions. Width, Length & Thickness: defines the overall dimensions of the footing Load Location: defines the offset from the center of the footing where the axial load is applied. Only one direction can be used. Pedestal dimensions: If a concrete pedestal bears on the footing, its dimensions can be specified here. The px and pz dimensions are used to define the locations on all four sides where one-way shear, two-way shear and bending moment are calculated. If you enter a nonzero height, then you can choose to have the weight of that prism calculated and added as dead load. Note: Any applied overburden loads will be omitted from the area defined as the pedestal dimension along the xx and yy axis, regardless of the specified height of the prism.
Footing Reinforcing
Calculation Modules
440
This tab allows you to specify the reinforcing in each direction of the footing.
Applied VERTICAL Loads This tab allows you to specify the axial load applied to the pedestal location and an overburden load applied to the entire plan dimension of the footing (except the area designated as the pedestal). Enter loads with a positive sign for downward direction. Note! This module will not allow a net uplift on the footing. If the result of the factored axial loads (dead, live, wind, etc) produces a negative load sign, the module will not recalculate and will notify you of which load combination resulted in net uplift.
Applied BENDING Loads This tab allows you to enter applied moments.
441
Applied SHEAR Loads This tab allows you to enter applied shear forces. These loads are applied at the location of the pedestal. If the pedestal is specified to have a height, the shear will be applied at that height and will create a moment on the footing equal to Shear Load * (Footing Thickness + Pedestal Height).
Load Combinations - Service This is the typical load combination tab used throughout the Structural Engineering Library. The Service Combinations tab is used to calculate soil pressures to be compared to the allowable soil bearing pressure. The "Soil Increase" is a factor that can be specified individually for each load combination and is applied to the allowable soil bearing pressure.
Calculation Modules
442
Load Combinations - Factored This is the typical load combination tab used throughout the Structural Engineering Library for strength design. These load combinations are used to calculate moments and shears in the footing for use in determining stresses and required reinforcing. Note: The General Footing module is applying the factored loads to the footing and determining a different eccentricity than was determined using the service loads for the soil bearing pressure check.
Results Tab This tab provides a summary of all calculated values. The stress ratios, applied & allowable values and load combination for those governing values are reported.
443
Soil Pressures Tab This tab summarizes the calculated service load soil bearing pressure for moments & shears applied about the specified axis, for each load combination.
Overturning Stability Tab This tab provides the calculations for overturning and resisting moment stability of the footing about each axis and for each load combination. Please note that the load combinations used here are internally generated and are NOT from the Service Load Combinations you have entered.
Sliding Stability Tab
Calculation Modules
444
This tab provides the calculations for applied and resisting sliding stability of the footing in each axis direction and for each load combination. Please note the load combinations used here are internally generated and are NOT from the Service Load Combinations you have entered.
Footing Bending Tab This tab provides a summary of the calculated factored load moment at all four edges of the pedestal perimeter for each load combination.
Footing Shear Tab This tab provides a summary of the calculated factored load shear at all four edges of the pedestal perimeter for each load combination. Two-way or punching shear is also calculated.
445
Sketch Tab
Calculation Modules
446
10.6.2 Combined Footing

Need more? Ask Us a Question This module provides analysis of a rectangular footing with two applied axial, moment and shear loads. Overburden loads can also be specified, and will apply to the surface area of the footing (except the areas covered by the two piers). The module allows you to position the application of the pier loads as necessary, and provides automatic calculation of allowable soil bearing pressure increases based on footing dimensions and/or depth below surface. The module checks service load soil pressure, overturning stability, sliding stability, uplift stability, footing flexure and one-way and two-way footing shear.
General f'c 28-day compressive strength of the concrete. fy Yield point stress of reinforcing. Ec Modulus of elasticity of concrete.
447
Concrete Density The density of the concrete is used to calculate the self weight of the pedestals and footing when those options are selected. Phi Values Enter the capacity reduction values to be applied to Vn and Mn. Include footing weight as dead load Click [Yes] to have the module calculate the weight of the footing and apply it as a downward load. The footing self weight will be multiplied by the dead load factor in each load combination. Include pedestal weight as dead load Click [Yes] to have the module calculate the weight of the pedestals and apply it as downward loads. The pedestal self weight will be multiplied by the dead load factor in each load combination. Min Steel Ratio - Bending Enter the minimum ratio for bending steel, calculated using the "d" distance from compression edge to rebar centroid. This will trigger a warning message if the section is under-reinforced. Min Steel Ratio - Temperature/Shrinkage Enter the minimum ratio for temperature/shrinkage steel, calculated using the footing thickness. This will also trigger a warning message if the section is under-reinforced. Minimum Overturning Safety Factor Enter the minimum allowable ratio of resisting moment to overturning moment. If the actual ratio is less than the specified minimum ratio, it will trigger a message that overturning stability is not satisfied. Minimum Sliding Safety Factor Enter the minimum allowable ratio of resisting force to sliding force. If the actual ratio is less than the specified minimum ratio, it will trigger a message that sliding stability is not satisfied.
Calculation Modules
448
Soil Allowables Allowable Soil Bearing Enter the allowable soil bearing pressure that the soil can resist. This is a service load resistance and will be compared to calculated service load soil pressures (loads not factored as in strength design). Increase Bearing by Footing Weight Click [Yes] to tell the module to calculate the weight of one square foot (plan view) of footing and add it to the allowable soil bearing value. This has the effect of not penalizing the soil for the self weight of the footing, and is useful for situations where the geotechnical engineering report provides allowable net bearing pressures. Soil Passive Sliding Resistance Enter the value of passive soil pressure resistance to sliding. This value will be used to determine a component of sliding resistance that is generated by the passive pressure of the soil. The sliding resistance due to passive pressure is then added to the sliding resistance due to friction to determine the total resistance to sliding for each load combination. Coefficient of Soil/Concrete Friction Enter the coefficient of friction between soil and footing to use in sliding resistance calculations. Soil Bearing Increase This section allows you to specify some dimensions that, when exceeded, will automatically increase the allowable soil bearing pressure. Footing base depth below soil surface: The distance from the bottom of the footing to the top of the soil. This value is used to determine allowable soil bearing pressure increases and soil passive sliding resistance, but it is not used in any other calculations in this module. Increases based on footing depth: Provides a method to automatically apply increases to the basic allowable soil bearing pressure based on footing depth below some reference depth. Collects the following parameters: Allowable pressure increase per foot: Specifies the amount that the basic allowable soil bearing pressure can be increased for each foot of depth below some reference depth. When base of footing is below: Specifies the required depth in order to start realizing incremental increases in the allowable soil bearing pressure on the basis of footing depth. Example: Assume the following: Basic Allowable Soil Bearing Pressure = 3 ksf. Footing base is 6'-0" below soil surface. The Geotechnical report specifies that a 0.15 ksf increase in bearing pressure is allowed for each foot of depth when the base is deeper than 4' below top of soil. Since you've indicated that the footing is 6' below the
449
soil surface, the module will automatically calculate the adjusted allowable soil bearing pressure to be 3 ksf + (6' - 4') * 0.15 ksf = 3.30 ksf. Increases based on footing plan dimension: Provides a method to automatically apply increases to the basic allowable soil bearing pressure based on footing dimensions greater than some reference dimension. Collects the following parameters: Allowable pressure increase per foot: Specifies the amount that the basic allowable soil bearing pressure can be increased for each foot of width or length greater than some reference dimension. When maximum length or width is greater than: Specifies the required dimension in order to start realizing incremental increases in the allowable soil bearing pressure on the basis of footing dimension. Example: Assume the following: Basic Allowable Soil Bearing Pressure = 3 ksf. Footing measures 12'-0" x 6'-0". The Geotechnical report specifies that a 0.15 ksf increase in soil bearing pressure is allowed for each foot when the largest plan dimension of the footing is greater than 4'. The module will automatically calculate the adjusted allowable soil bearing pressure to be 3 ksf + (12' - 4') * 0.15 ksf = 4.2 ksf. Note: Increases based on footing depth and plan dimensions are cumulative.
Footing Size & Reinforcing Dimensions tab Projection on Left, Distance Between Columns, Projection on Right: Define the dimensions of the footing in the Length direction. Footing Width: Define the dimension of the Width direction. Footing Thickness: Define the total thickness of the footing. Pedestal dimensions: If concrete pedestals bear on the footing, their dimensions
Calculation Modules
450
can be specified here. Pedestals are assumed to be square, and they are assumed to be centered on the Width dimension of the footing. Note: Any applied overburden loads will be omitted from the area occupied by the pedestals.
Reinforcing tab Reinforcing parallel to the Length dimension can be defined separately for the left and right projections of the footing and for the area between the columns. Input fields are provided to define top bars and bottom bars separately. Note: Bars are assumed to be fully developed at the locations where they are required. It is the engineer's responsibility to validate that assumption. The program is not taking rebar development length into consideration.
Applied Loads The Applied Loads tab provides sub-tabs for Column #1 (the column on the left), Column #2 (the column on the right), and Overburden. The two column load tabs offer input fields for vertical loads, moment about the Length axis, and shear in the Length direction. The Overburden tab provides input fields for a uniform vertical pressure that will be applied to the entire surface area of the footing with the exception of the areas occupied by the pedestals.
451
Load Combinations The Load Combinations tab is used to specify the load combinations to be used in the design. The Service Combinations tab controls the load combinations that are used to perform the serviceability checks for Soil Bearing, Overturning, Sliding, and Uplift. The Factored Combinations tab controls the load combinations that are used to perform the strength checks for Flexure, One-Way Shear, and Two-Way Punching Shear. These tabs allow the user to select from load combination sets that are supplied with the program or to select from custom load combination sets that have been created and saved on the user's machine. It is also possible to unlock the selected load combination set and make edits to the factors directly in this view. The user has control over which combinations are run and which are ignored. A Soil Increase factor can be applied on a load combination by load combination basis, as permitted by the geotechnical engineering report. Finally, this tab allows the user to specify whether the program should consider the algebraic sign of the specified load factors on wind loads and seismic loads to be reversible or not. This can be a convenient way to ensure that these loads are investigated as acting in both positive and negative directions, if that is the design intent. Note, however, that if selected, the algebraic sign reversal will be applied to ALL wind loads and/or ALL seismic loads including horizontally AND vertically applied loads.
Calculation Modules
452
Calculations Results tab This tab summarizes the controlling values (highest utilization ratio) for each design consideration, from all of the load combinations that have been run. For the controlling load combination, it presents the Applied load, the Capacity or available resisting load, the ratio of the Applied to the Capacity, and the governing load combination that produces this controlling ratio.
Soil Pressures tab For each service load combination, this tab presents the total vertical load, the resultant eccentricity, the soil pressures on the left and the right ends of the footing, the allowable soil pressure, and the ratio of the actual to the allowable soil pressure.
453
Overturning & Sliding Stability tab For each service load combination, this tab presents the overturning moment, the resisting moment and the ratio of the resisting to overturning moment about the left and right edges of the footing. It also reports the sliding force, the resisting force, and the ratio of the resisting to sliding force.
Footing Bending tab This tab reports the results of the flexural design on a load combination by load combination basis, at small increments along the length of the footing.
Footing Shear tab This tab reports the results of the one-way and two-way shear design on a load
Calculation Modules
454
combination by load combination basis.
Sketch tab This tab provides a plan view and a longitudinal section view of the footing with rebar callouts and overall dimensions.
455
10.6.3 Wall Footing

Need more? Ask Us a Question This module provides analysis of a unit strip of a continuous wall footing with applied axial, moment and shear loads. Overburden loads can also be specified, and will apply to the surface area of the footing (except the area covered by the wall). The module also provides automatic calculation of allowable soil bearing pressure increases based on footing width and/or depth below surface. The module checks service load soil pressure, overturning stability, sliding stability, uplift stability, footing flexure and one-way footing shear.
General This tab collects material property values, strength reduction factors, and other settings that influence the design. f'c 28-day compressive strength of the concrete. fy Yield point stress of reinforcing. Ec
Calculation Modules
456
Modulus of elasticity of concrete. Concrete Density The density of the concrete is used to calculate the self weight of the footing when the option is selected. Phi Values Enter the capacity reduction values to be applied to Vn and Mn. Include footing weight as dead load Click [Yes] to have the module calculate the weight of the footing and apply it as a downward load. The footing self weight will be multiplied by the dead load factor in each load combination. Min Steel Ratio - Bending Reinf. Enter the minimum ratio for bending steel, calculated using the "d" distance from compression edge to rebar centroid. This will trigger a warning message if the section is under-reinforced. Min Steel Ratio - Temperature/Shrinkage Reinf. Enter the minimum ratio for temperature/shrinkage steel, calculated using the footing thickness. This will also trigger a warning message if the section is under-reinforced. Minimum Overturning Safety Factor Enter the minimum allowable ratio of resisting moment to overturning moment. If the actual ratio is less than the specified minimum ratio, it will trigger a message that overturning stability is not satisfied. Minimum Sliding Safety Factor Enter the minimum allowable ratio of resisting force to sliding force. If the actual ratio is less than the specified minimum ratio, it will trigger a message that sliding stability is not satisfied.
Soil Allowables
457
Allowable Soil Bearing Pressure Enter the allowable soil bearing pressure. This is a service load resistance and will be compared to calculated service load soil pressures (loads not factored as in strength design). Increase Bearing by Footing Weight Click [Yes] to tell the module to calculate the weight of one square foot (plan view) of footing and add it to the allowable soil bearing value. This has the effect of not penalizing the soil for the self weight of the footing, and is useful for situations where the geotechnical engineering report provides allowable net bearing pressures. Soil Passive Sliding Resistance Enter the value of passive soil pressure resistance to sliding. This value will be used to determine a component of sliding resistance that is generated by the passive pressure of the soil. The sliding resistance due to passive pressure is then added to the sliding resistance due to friction to determine the total resistance to sliding for each load combination. Coefficient of Soil/Concrete Friction Enter the coefficient of friction between soil and footing to use in sliding resistance calculations. Soil Bearing Increase This section allows you to specify some dimensions that, when exceeded, will automatically increase the allowable soil bearing pressure. Footing base depth below soil surface: The distance from the bottom of the footing to the top of the soil. This value is used to determine allowable soil bearing pressure increases and soil passive sliding resistance, but it is NOT used in any other calculations in this module. Increases based on footing depth: Provides a method to automatically apply increases to the basic allowable soil bearing pressure based on footing depth below some reference depth. Collects the following parameters: Allowable pressure increase per foot: Specifies the amount that the basic allowable soil bearing pressure can be increased for each foot of depth below some reference depth. When base of footing is below: Specifies the required depth in order to start realizing incremental increases in the allowable soil bearing pressure on the basis of footing depth. Example: Assume the following: Basic Allowable Soil Bearing Pressure = 3 ksf. Footing base is 6'-0" below soil surface. The Geotechnical report specifies that a 0.15 ksf increase in bearing pressure is allowed for each foot of depth when the base is deeper than 4' below top of soil. Since you've indicated that the footing is 6' below the soil surface, the module will automatically calculate the adjusted allowable soil bearing pressure to be 3 ksf + (6' - 4') * 0.15 ksf = 3.30 ksf.
Calculation Modules
458
Increases based on footing width: Provides a method to automatically apply increases to the basic allowable soil bearing pressure based on footing width greater than some reference dimension. Collects the following parameters: Allowable pressure increase per foot: Specifies the amount that the basic allowable soil bearing pressure can be increased for each foot of width greater than some reference dimension. When maximum length or width is greater than: Specifies the required dimension in order to start realizing incremental increases in the allowable soil bearing pressure on the basis of footing width. Example: Assume the following: Basic Allowable Soil Bearing Pressure = 3 ksf. Footing measures 6'-0" wide. The Geotechnical report specifies that a 0.15 ksf increase in soil bearing pressure is allowed for each foot when the width of the footing is greater than 4'-0". The module will automatically calculate the adjusted allowable soil bearing pressure to be 3 ksf + (6' - 4') * 0.15 ksf = 3.3 ksf. Note: Increases based on footing depth and width are cumulative.
Footing Size & Reinforcing Dimensions tab Footing Width: Define the width of the footing. Wall Width: Define the width of the supported wall. Wall center offset from footing centerline: Define the dimension between the centerline of the wall and the centerline of the footing. Positive offsets shift the wall toward the right edge of the footing. Footing Thickness: Define the thickness of the footing.
459
Auto Calculate Footing Size & Thickness: Provides an automated routine to increase footing dimensions until soil pressures are satisfied and one-way shear is acceptable. Note: Any applied overburden loads will be omitted from the area occupied by the wall.
Reinforcing tab Reinforcing Bar Size: Indicate the rebar size to consider for the bars that run parallel to the footing width. Rebar Spacing: Provides an option to either specify an explicit value for the rebar spacing, or to specify the number of bars in a 12-inch length. Rebar Center to Concrete Edge @ Bottom: Specify the clear cover plus 1/2 the diameter of the rebar.
Applied Loads Vertical Loads tab Provides input fields for vertical loads and overburden pressures. Vertical loads are specified in units of kips per foot, and they are considered to act at the center of the
Calculation Modules
460
width of the wall. Overburden loads are specified in units of kips per square foot, and they are considered to act on the top surface area of the footing, excluding the area occupied by the wall.
Moments & Shears tab Provides input fields for moments and shears. Moments are specified in units of foot kips per foot. Shears are specified in units of kips per foot, and they are considered to act at the height specified in the field named Shear application above top of footing. Shears will produce a moment equal to the shear force times the distance from the bottom of the footing to the location of application of the shear force.
Load Combinations The Load Combinations tab is used to specify the load combinations to be used in the design. The Service Combinations tab controls the load combinations that are used to perform the serviceability checks for Soil Bearing, Overturning, Sliding, and Uplift. The Factored Combinations tab controls the load combinations that are used to perform the strength checks for Flexure and One-Way Shear. These tabs allow the user to select from load combination sets that are supplied with the program or to select from custom load combination sets that have been created and saved on the user's machine. It is also possible to unlock the selected load combination
461
set and make edits to the factors directly in this view. The user has control over which combinations are run and which are ignored. A Soil Increase factor can be applied on a load combination by load combination basis, as permitted by the geotechnical engineering report. Finally, this tab allows the user to specify whether the program should consider the algebraic sign of the specified load factors on wind loads and seismic loads to be reversible or not. This can be a convenient way to ensure that these loads are investigated as acting in both positive and negative directions, if that is the design intent. Note, however, that if selected, the algebraic sign reversal will be applied to ALL wind loads and/or ALL seismic loads including horizontally AND vertically applied loads.
Calculations Results tab This tab summarizes the controlling values (highest utilization ratio) for each design consideration, from all of the load combinations that have been run. For the controlling load combination, it presents the Applied load, the Capacity or available resisting load, the ratio of the Applied to the Capacity, and the governing load combination that produces this controlling ratio.
Calculation Modules
462
Soil Pressures tab For each service load combination, this tab presents the total vertical load, the resultant eccentricity, the soil pressures on the left and the right ends of the footing, the allowable soil pressure, and the ratio of the actual to the allowable soil pressure.
Overturning & Sliding Stability tab For each service load combination, this tab presents the overturning moment, the resisting moment and the ratio of the resisting to overturning moment about the left and right edges of the footing.
It also reports the sliding force, the resisting force, and the ratio of the resisting to sliding force.
463
Footing Bending tab This tab reports the results of the flexural design on a load combination by load combination basis.
Footing Shear tab This tab reports the results of the shear design on a load combination by load combination basis.
Sketch tab This tab presents plan and section views of the footing:
Calculation Modules
464
465
10.6.4 Point Load on Slab

This module calculates the capacity of an unreinforced concrete slab to support isolated concentrated loads. Typical use is for legs of storage racks not supported by a building structure, and this not within the scope of the ACI code. The design method is based on the recent research of Shentu, Jiang and Hsu. For further information see (1) "Load carrying capacity for concrete slabs on grade" in the the ACE Journal of Structural Engineering January 1997; (2) Acceptable Design & Analysis methods for use of slabs-on-grade foundations, City of Los Angeles LAMC91.1806 and (3) Seismic considerations for steel storage racks, FEMA 460 September 2005. The work of Shentu and colleagues has shown that load carrying capacity, verified with test results, can be very closely predicted using the formulas given below. Rather than historical elastic methods, the method used here is elasto-plastic which is more applicable to ultimate capacity determination. Allowable load capacity is given by this equation: Pn = 1.72 [(ks R1 / Ec ) 10,000 + 3.60] * ft' * d2 Where ks is the modulus of subgrade reaction of the soil, pci R1 is sqrt(Plate Width * Plate Length) / 2, inches Ec is the concrete elastic modulus, psi ft' is the tensile strength of the concrete = 7.5 sqrt(f'c), psi d is the slab thickness, inches
The above equation assumes that the load acting on the slab is unique and no other nearby loads are affecting the calculation. To assist in the evaluation of slabs-on-grade, this module also provides a calculation of the distance that the closest load may be without affecting the calculated slab capacity. The calculation given below is based on research of Packard, Pickett & Ray and more recently by Spears and Panarese. It is also discussed in ACI 360R-92(4). In this module the distance is calculated as 1.5 * "Radius of Relative Stiffness" given by the following equation: b = [ Ec d3 / (12 * (1-u2) * ks )] 0.25
Calculation Modules
466
Where b is the radius of relative stiffness Ec is the concrete elastic modulus, psi d is the slab thickness, inches u is Poisson's ratio which is set to 0.15 in this module ks is the modulus of subgrade reaction of the soil, pci Additionally this module allows the user to enter a Factor of Safety that is used when the module reports the adequacy of each applied load. Tabular Entry Screen
This module is designed to allow the user to create a table of loads applied to a particular concrete slab and supporting soil with one set of material properties. You can then use the [Add], [Edit] and [Delete] buttons to add a set of applied loads and base plate dimensions. From this data all load combinations are used to determine the maximum axial force. For the plate dimension you specify, the maximum load capacity for the point load application is calculated and compared with your required factor of safety. The option for ASD or LRFD analysis only changes the load combination set used. Because this is a non-ACI design process, you need to enter a Factor of Safety to determine the final design status. Research material suggests a F.S. of 3.0.
467
Load Combinations
Calculation Modules
468
10.6.5 Pile Group

Need more? Ask Us a Question This module considers a concentrated load applied to a rigid pile cap and distributes it to a group of piles. Force distribution is performed assuming a rigid pile cap and that all piles have equal vertical load resistance. Distribution of loads to each pile due to the effect of load eccentricity is determined using a skew bending analysis. This considers simultaneous action about both X and Y axes. The module is also an efficient method for determining loads on a pile group in the asdriven arrangement.
General Tab
469
NOTE! Establish an X & Y Coordinate system prior to entering pile and load locations. Total Applied Axial Load Enter the total vertical load to be distributed to the piles in the pile group using the coordinate system you have defined. Note: Only vertical loads are allowed; no lateral shears. X & Y Distance to Load Enter the distance from the X & Y datum (0,0) to the location of the applied vertical load. Number of Piles This entry defines the number of piles in the group. As you change the number of piles, the number of data entry locations will match the specified number of piles. Pile Locations: distance from Datum to the pile Enter the distance from the X & Y datum (0,0) to the center of each pile location. Load Combination to use This selection will switch the load combinations shown on the Load Combinations tab between Service and Factored design combinations. Load Combination Tab This tab allows you to specify the load combinations to be considered.
Calculation Modules
470
Results Tab This tab summarizes the overall calculated values for the pile group and lists the maximum factored load for each pile and the load combination that produced the maximum load.
Detailed Results Tab This tab gives the detailed calculations for each pile for each load combination. It indicates the Direct force as well as the component of axial load that is due to the net moment applied to the entire group. This latter effect will be observed for any pile that is located at a distance from the center of gravity of the pile group.
471
Sketch Tab
Calculation Modules
472
10.7
2-D Frame Analysis

Need more? Ask Us a Question This module provides force & deflection analysis, steel member stress analysis and wood stress analysis for two dimensional frames. The frame you create can be general in nature...the module is not limited to trusses or frames with rigid connections. You have the ability to specify the connection between all members in terms of axial, shear and bending restraints or releases. Here are the highlights of this module: Use the Frame Wizard to automatically create common trusses and frames. Generic joint & member method of specifying the geometry of the frame. Completely flexible way to specify how the X, Y & Z degrees of freedom for joints are connected to the earth and how the members are connected to the joints (three degrees of freedom are available at each end of each member). Apply forces and moments directly to joints. You can also specify joint start temperatures. All loads can have dead, live, roof live, snow, wind, seismic and earth types. Apply concentrated and distributed loads to beams. These loads can be Global or local in direction and can be applied as forces, moments or temperature changes. Members are easily linked to section properties. For stress analysis you can set unbraced length, slenderness factors, Cb & Cm for members. Loads and members can be deactivated for quick modeling of alternatives. Complete AISC and NDS section databases are available. Specify material properties used by sections. Specify an extensive set of load combinations. Complete graphics of frame with deflected shapes. Complete stress & deflection diagrams of members individually. Extensive reporting capability and control. Module uses beam elements and a very fast matrix solver. With each change of the input data, the frame can be completely recalculated in an instant. (For convenience with large models or when running many load combinations, this module has been enhanced with the ability to turn the Automatic Recalculation feature off, and to trigger manual recalculations only when desired.) Note: This module is intended to be a simple alternative to complex frame programs. The intent is to provide a simple and fast tool to perform simple indeterminate analysis & member design. No P-Delta effects, exotic elements, or non-linear analysis will ever be added to this module.
473
Program Limitations Maximum Number of Allowed:
Calculation Modules
474
475
Calculation Modules
476
477
10.7.1 Frame Wizard

Overview The Frame Wizard can create complete 2D Frame models for many typical framing configurations and truss layouts with just a few simple inputs. The Frame Wizard is also especially helpful when you are just beginning to use this module and want to learn about how to specify joint end restraints and member end releases. Types of Models the Frame Wizard Can Generate Pratt Truss
Warren Truss
Vierendeel Truss
Howe Truss
Inverted Warren Truss
Single Bay 3-Member Frame
Continuous Member
Calculation Modules
478
Multi-Bay One Story Frame
Multi-Story Single Bay Frame
Multi-Story Frame
Please send additional requests to support@enercalc.com.
Example: Using the Frame Wizard to create a Pratt Truss Creating a truss with the Frame Wizard is extremely simple. Just start by selecting [ Pratt] and clicking [Next].
479
The screen you see below will be displayed.
Simply enter the overall length and height of the truss and the number of panels the truss will have. The sample image shown has 6 panels. The next entries allow you to easily specify a member size for the three main members that are typically the same on a truss like this (Verticals, Horizontals, and Diagonals). The button to the right of each data entry area provides access to the built-in section database in the Structural Engineering Library.
Calculation Modules
480
If you DO specify a database section, all of the associated section properties will be brought into the frame model for you. If you DO NOT specify a database section, then the members will be assigned a name of "Vertical", "Diagonal" or "Chord" as a section group. Then all you need to do is enter property values for those three sections. To finish just click [Finish]. The model will be instantly created. Example: Using the Frame Wizard to create a Continuous Beam The Frame Wizard is an extremely efficient way to model a continuous beam. Just start by selecting [Continuous Member] and then click [Next].
The screen you see below will be displayed:
481
Note: This wizard allows just one beam to be entered BUT you can easily change that beam specification for each span after the model is built. Enter the Number of Spans first. The next entry allows you to easily specify a member section name. The button to the right of each data entry area provides access to the built-in section database in the Structural Engineering Library. If you DO specify a database section, all of the associated section properties will be brought into the continuous beam model for you. If you DO NOT specify a database section then the members will be assigned a name of "Beam" as a section group. Then all you need to do is enter property values for that section. For specification of span lengths you can either use [Equal Spacing]:
-or- [Specify Spacing] which allows you to enter the span lengths for each span. Then just click [Finish], and the model will be instantly created.
Calculation Modules
482
10.7.2 Joints & Joint Loads

Need more? Ask Us a Question Joints are the points in space where members are interconnected. Members can ONLY connect to another member or the boundary by first connecting to a joint. IMPORTANT: See JOINT RESTRAINTS below. Joints & Loads Tab This tab contains two sub-tabs that allow you to specify joints and loads applied to the joints. Note: The data entered into this module is linked by a database system. The effects of this linking can be seen in the screen capture seen below. Notice that the table in the upper half of the view lists available joints for which Joint Data can be viewed. As a result of the data linking, selecting Joint #1 in the upper table automatically causes the lower table to display a list of members connected to Joint #1.
Automatic Joint Generation You can use the [Generate] button to have joints automatically generated. The joint
483
generation popup is self explanatory....just select from the mode of generation, specify a label increment, the number of joints to generate, and the x and y distance increments to use. The "Grid Irregular X & Y" can generate some very complex joint layouts. Another powerful tool is the Also Generate Members option, which will generate members to interconnect between the joints for the generation grid or arc/circle you have specified.
JOINT RESTRAINTS These interconnections are extremely important, and when set incorrectly, they lead to the majority of the instabilities and other unexpected results when using this 2-D Frame Analysis module. The connections between members and the connections to "ground" have a significant effect on structural behavior, and as such, they warrant a thorough discussion and complete understanding. Always keep in mind the following concepts related to joint boundary restraints and the end releases of the member(s) connecting to the joint: Joints have Degrees of Freedom (DOF) associated with them. In the 2-D Frame Analysis program, each joint has two translational and one rotational DOF. An individual DOF may be restrained or released. DOF can be defined as Boundary Restraints or as Member End Releases. When the degrees of freedom are defined as Boundary Restraints, they are defined with respect to the global coordinate axis system. When the degrees of freedom are defined as Member End Releases, they are defined with respect to the member local coordinate axis system. The term Degrees of Freedom refers to the capability of a joint to move in the X and Y
Calculation Modules
484
direction and to rotate about the Z axis. An X Restraint prevents a joint from moving in the Global X direction. A Y Restraint prevents a joint from moving in the Global Y direction. A Z Restraint prevents a joint from rotating about the Global Z axis. Please see the diagram below for a brief primer on joint restraints and member releases. The dark black items define the joint restraints. Joint restraints attach the joint to the boundary. The boundary is an infinitely stiff support and is most commonly called earth. When a joint is restrained against translation in the X and Y directions and against rotation about the Z axis, it is held firmly in place. Any forces or moments applied to it will result in a reaction which is the boundary applying a force to the joint to keep it from moving in a particular direction. THE MOST IMPORTANT PIECE OF INFORMATION: Each joint must be prevented from moving in/rotating about each of its three degrees of freedom, either by a joint restraint or by a positive connection to member. If a joint can translate or rotate in an unrestrained manner, then it is unstable. NEXT MOST IMPORTANT PIECE OF INFORMATION: When a joint restraint is specified, then any connected members that are not released in that particular direction will not deflect in that direction. If a joint has an "X" restraint and a member framing into that joint does not have an "X" release, then the member is actually rigidly connected to the boundary through the joint. ALSO IMPORTANT: When you are modeling a frame, nearly all joints will be free from the boundary. This means that those joints will need to have their X, Y & Z degrees of freedom restrained by a connection to one or more members. Because members can only attach to each other through a joint, this is usually handled by virtue of the member having all three degrees of freedom "fixed" at its ends. BUT FOR TRUSS CONNECTIONS, THIS CAN CAUSE PROBLEMS WITH THE "Z" rotational degree of freedom. For truss models (where moments are not applied to nodes), it may be easier to achieve stability for all joints by declaring all joints as "fixed" against rotation about the Zaxis, and then "pinning" both ends of all members to prevent the transfer of moment from one member to another.
485
10.7.2.1 Joint Data
Joint Data Tab This tab is where you add and edit the joints that define the member interconnections for the frame.
Calculation Modules
486
Joint Label The label for a joint can be up to 25 characters long. They are CASE INSENSITIVE meaning the module internally converts all joint names to all lower case for internal usage. Location This is the X and Y location of the joint in a Cartesian coordinate system. Boundary Restraints These specify how the joint is connected to the boundary. The boundary is an infinitely rigid item and is typically earth. See the Joints & Joint Loads 482 topic for more information. When you click on these items (or use [Tab] to move between them) the entry turns into a drop-down list box with the available selections.
Temperature
487
This specifies the base temperature for the joint. It is only used when you are defining temperature loads for the members. [+Add Joint] Prompts you for the label to assign to the newly added joint. Joint labels can be up to 25 characters long.
[- Delete Joint] Deletes the highlighted joint after your confirmation. Keep in mind that members depend upon joints for connectivity. So if there are any members connected to a joint, the members will be deleted if the joint is deleted. Any joint loads that were assigned to a joint will also be deleted if the joint is deleted.
Generate See bottom of this section. Joint Sketch/Full Frame Sketch The Joint Sketch displays a graphic representation of the individual joint that is currently selected in the list of joints. The Full Frame Sketch displays a graphic representation of the entire model with the currently selected joint highlighted for easy recognition. Editing Joint Information Click on any data item when the joint list first appears, and the list will switch into an editing mode. See the image below where we have clicked on the "X Loc" for joint 1.
Calculation Modules
488
You can type in a numeric value or use the "spin" buttons to change the value by a fixed decimal amount. To finish the entry either press [Tab], [Enter] or click on another data item in the list. When your entry is completed the entire frame will be recalculated if the Auto Calculate option is selected. Automatic Joint Generation You can use the [Generate] button to initiate the automatic generation of joints. Just select from the mode of generation, and you can specify the label and the x and y distance increments to use. The "Grid Irregular X & Y" can generate some very complex joint layouts. Another powerful tool is the Also Generate Members option, which will generate members to interconnect the joints for the generation grid or arc/circle you have specified.
489
10.7.2.2 Joint Loads & Results
Joint Loads & Results Tab This tab provides the input locations for all loads applied to the joints in the frame EXCEPT member self weights. This tab is divided into three sections: Select Joint: list is where you select the joint for which you wish to modify loads. This selection controls what is visible in the other two lists. Applied Loads for Joint: is where you build and edit the loads applied to that joint Calculated Results for Joint: displays the calculated displacements and reactions for the joint selected in the Select Joint list. The only list that can be edited is the Applied Loads for Joint list.
Calculation Modules
490
Adding & Deleting Loads To add a joint load just click the [Add Load] button and a new load entry line will be added at the bottom of the list for the currently selected joint. To delete a load just click on the load line you wish to delete and click the [Delete Load] button. Editing Joint Load Information Click on any data item in the joint load list, and it will switch into an editing mode. See the image below where we have clicked on the Dead load column in the first line in the list of loads associated with joint 1.
You can type in a numeric value or use the "spin" buttons to change the value by a fixed decimal amount.
491
To finish the entry either press [Tab], [Enter] or click on another data item in the list. When your entry is completed the entire frame will be recalculated if the Auto Calculate option is selected. Note: If a load is applied in the same direction that a Joint Restraint is specified, that load will immediately be "absorbed" by the joint restraint, so it will not have any effect on the frame.
Calculation Modules
492
10.7.3 Members & Member Loads

Need more? Ask Us a Question "Member" is the generic term that describes the beams, columns, struts, braces, diagonals, hangers, and other structural entities that make up the frame. This module uses a general stiffness matrix approach to solve for forces and deflections. Members are modeled by one-dimensional (length-only) entities that offer resistance to axial loads, bending moment about an axis perpendicular to the plane of the frame, and shear forces acting in the plane of the frame. Members & Loads Tab
Member End Releases These interconnections lead to the greatest potential for instabilities and other unexpected effects from the use of the 2-D module. The connections between members and the connections to "ground" have a significant effect on structural behavior, and as such, they warrant a thorough discussion and complete understanding. Always keep in mind the following concepts related to joint boundary restraints and the end releases of the member (s) connecting to the joint: Joints have Degrees of Freedom (DOF) associated with them. In the 2-D Frame Analysis program, each joint has two translational and one rotational DOF.
493
An individual DOF may be restrained or released. DOF can be defined as Boundary Restraints or as Member End Releases. When the degrees of freedom are defined as Boundary Restraints, they are defined with respect to the global coordinate axis system. When the degrees of freedom are defined as Member End Releases, they are defined with respect to the member local coordinate axis system. The term Degrees of Freedom refers to the capability of a joint to move in the X and Y direction and to rotate about the Z axis. An X Restraint prevents a joint from moving in the Global X direction. A Y Restraint prevents a joint from moving in the Global Y direction. A Z Restraint prevents a joint from rotating about the Global Z axis. Please see the diagram below for a brief primer on joint restraints and member releases. The dark black items define the joint restraints. Joint restraints attach the joint to the boundary. The boundary is an infinitely stiff support and is most commonly called earth. When a joint is restrained against translation in the X and Y directions and against rotation about the Z axis, it is held firmly in place. Any forces or moments applied to it will result in a reaction which is the boundary applying a force to the joint to keep it from moving in a particular direction. THE MOST IMPORTANT PIECE OF INFORMATION: Each joint must be prevented from moving in/rotating about each of its three degrees of freedom, either by a joint restraint or by a positive connection to member. If a joint can translate or rotate in an unrestrained manner, then it is unstable. NEXT MOST IMPORTANT PIECE OF INFORMATION: When a joint restraint is specified, then any connected members that are not released in that particular direction will not deflect in that direction. If a joint has an "X" restraint and a member framing into that joint does not have an "X" release, then the member is actually rigidly connected to the boundary through the joint. ALSO IMPORTANT: When you are modeling a frame, nearly all joints will be free from the boundary. This means that those joints will need to have their X, Y & Z degrees of freedom restrained by a connection to one or more members. Because members can only attach to each other through a joint, this is usually handled by virtue of the member having all three degrees of freedom "fixed" at its ends. BUT FOR TRUSS CONNECTIONS, THIS CAN CAUSE PROBLEMS WITH THE "Z" rotational degree of freedom. For truss models (where moments are not applied to nodes), it may be easier to achieve stability for all joints by declaring all joints as "fixed" against rotation about the Zaxis, and then "pinning" both ends of all members to prevent the transfer of moment from one member to another.
Calculation Modules
494
10.7.3.1 Member Data
Member Data Tab Members always span between two joints. The Member End Conditions tell the module how each of the three degrees of freedom at each end of the member are attached to the joint. To connect two members rigidly together you must specify the two connecting ends as "fixed" conditions for all three degrees of freedom. That locks each beam end to the joint.
495
For each member you can specify the section to use for its properties, and values to be used when stress analysis is performed (unbraced length, slenderness factor, Cm and Cb). You can also set the member to be inactive to test force distributions and stresses for alternate framing conditions. Editing Member Information Click on any data item when the member list first appears, and the list will switch into an editing mode. See the image below where we have clicked on the "X" degree of freedom for the I: end of member 1-2.
You can type in a numeric value or use the "spin" buttons to change the value by a fixed decimal amount. To finish the entry, either press [Tab], [Enter] or click on another data item in the list. Note: Each column in the Member Data table can have its own type of editing mode. The Active column turns into a checkbox for yes/no selections. The Section Name column
Calculation Modules
496
turns into a button so you can select or add a section from the Section list. See descriptions for each item below. Adding & Deleting Members To add a member click the [Add Member] button. You will be prompted for three pieces of information: 1) A label for the member. 2) The member's "I" joint number. 3) The member's "J" joint number. In the screen capture below you will notice a button to the right of the joint label entries.
Just click in the "I" or "J" joint entry and click the [Lookup Joints] button . This will display a window where you can scroll through the list of created joints and select one. Simply click on one of the listed joints and then click [Select].
To delete a member, select the member and click [Delete Member]. After you approve the deletion, that member and all loads applied to that member will be deleted. Generating Members
497
You can use the [Generate] button to initiate the automatic generation of members. This is a simple process that automates member creation by generating members between existing nodes in the specified order. Note: This tool will generate new members, but it will not generate new nodes.
Detailed Item Descriptions (see 2 screen captures below) Member Label This label can be any combination of letters and numbers. It is common to use numbers for joints and letters for members, but a very convenient member labeling convention is to use the I and J joint numbers separated by a dash. So the member between joint 5 and 12 would be labeled "5-12". The member label can ONLY be specified when Adding the member. After that point, the name can't be changed unless the member is deleted and added again. Active This item is a yes/no selection. When you click on it or [Tab] to it, the entry changes to a checkbox. When the box is checked, the member will be considered active, meaning that it will contribute stiffness to the model. When the box is not checked, the member will be considered inactive, meaning that it will be ignored in the analysis and will not contribute stiffness to the model.
Calculation Modules
498
Section Name This establishes what section is to be used for that member. When you click on it or [ Tab] to it, the entry changes to a button labeled Lookup.
When you click the [Lookup] button, a selection window appears as shown below:
On this window you can scroll through the sections you have already added to the
499
section list. Note that the sections are listed with both Section labels and Group labels. A Group label is used when you want to have more than one member have the same section properties. In the screen capture above, notice that there are groups named "Chord", "Diagonal", and "Vertical", all of which have the same section assigned to them. This offers two convenient benefits: First, it provides a handy way to manage multiple sets of members, some of which may have the same section. Second, by assigning a group name to the appropriate members in the model, it is possible to change the AISC or NDS section assigned to all members of that group by simply assigning a new section to the group, rather than having to assign the new section to many individual members. The [+Add Section] button provides access to the built-in section property databases. It displays the screen below, which allows you to either type in a typical section name or click a button and display the database to select the desired section from the database.
Joints These two columns let you specify and change the i and j end joints of a member. When you click on these columns, the entry will change to a [Lookup] button as shown below:
Clicking that button displays a window where you can scroll through the joint list and click to identify the desired joint.
Calculation Modules
500
I & J End Conditions These six columns allow you to specify how the ends of the member are attached to the joints. When you click on or [Tab] to one of these columns, the entry will change to a drop-down list box offering appropriate fixity options:
In order to most efficiently describe the I & J End Conditions, it helps to introduce the concept of the member local axis system. Each member can be thought of as having its own x, y, and z coordinate axes that are mutually perpendicular and follow the right-hand rule. The orientation of the member local axes can be determined as follows:
501
1. The local x axis is always parallel to a vector from the "I" node to the "J" node. (This axis is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the member.) 2. The local z axis is always parallel to the Global Z axis. 3. The local y axis can be found by taking the vector cross product of local z cross local x. (Envision using the right hand to rotate the local z axis into the local x axis, and the right thumb will automatically indicate the positive direction of the local y axis.) Note: It is important to understand that I & J End Conditions are defined with respect to the member local axes, not the Global axis system. A "Fixed" status for a particular end of a member, for a particular degree of freedom (X, Y or Z) means that end of the member is locked to the joint for that degree of freedom. A "Free" or "Pinned" status means that end of the member is disconnected from the joint for that degree of freedom. Here are some examples: X, Y, Z Setting Fixed, Fixed, Fixed How it will work The member is locked to the joint. If this joint was completely restrained to the boundary, then this end of the member would have an X and Y force reaction and a Z moment reaction. The member is locked to the joint in its local X and Y directions, meaning that this end of the member cannot translate with respect to the joint, however, this end of the member is free to rotate independently of the joint about the member's local Z axis (which is always parallel to the Global Z axis). The member is locked to the joint with respect to translation in the local X axis direction. It is disconnected from the joint with respect to translation in the local Y axis direction. It is locked to the joint with respect to rotation about the member's local Z axis. If this member is oriented horizontally, then this combination of end conditions could be thought of as a vertical roller. When a member is in the horizontal orientation, its member local axes are parallel to the corresponding Global axes. Therefore, the fixed condition in the local X axis direction means that this end of this horizontal member cannot move left or right in the Global X direction. The free condition in the local Y direction means that this end of this horizontal member is free to move up and down in the Global Y direction. Finally, the fixed condition about the local Z axis means that this end of the member is fixed against rotation about the local Z axis, which is parallel to the Global Z axis.
Fixed, Fixed, Pinned
Fixed, Free, Fixed
Calculation Modules
502
Along the bottom of the list is a set of buttons that allows you to quickly set the Z-axis rotation end conditions. Clicking one of these buttons will set the end releases for both ends of the member that is currently selected in the list.
NOTE! A truss connection is unique. You must look at the joint where the truss members intersect. If they are all free to rotate, you will set the "X" and "Y" conditions of all member ends at that joint to "Fixed". And for all "Z" conditions you will set them to "Pinned" so they can rotate freely. For that joint you will set its "X" and "Y" restraint to "Free" (assuming it is not a support location) and set its "Z" restraint to "Fixed", so that the joint will be stable. Length This value is automatically calculated for you from the distance between the I and J joints. Unbraced Length You can enter the unbraced compression edge length that should be used for allowable stress analysis of this member. Entering a "-1" means to use the full length of the member. Any other number (0.00 or greater) is used as the unbraced length (except that it is limited to the member length). Slenderness This entry is a simple multiplier to be applied to the Unbraced Length you have entered. Cm & Cb You can specify these values for use in allowable stress calculations.
503
10.7.3.2 Member Loads
Member Loads Tab This tab provides the input locations for all loads applied to the frame EXCEPT joint loads and member self weights. This module can automatically generate member self weight loads using Member Self Wt item in the load combination lists. This tab contains three lists and one graphic area. Select Member: lists all members in the model. This is where you click to select a member for which to add/delete/modify loads. This selection controls what is visible on the other two lists and in the graphic image at the bottom. The column labeled # Lds indicates the number and type of loads that have been applied to each member. "P" represents a point load, and "D" is for distributed loads. "1-P, 2-D" means that the member has one point load and two distributed loads applied to it. Point Loads for Member X: shows the point loads that are applied to the selected member. Distributed Loads for Member X: shows the distributed loads that are applied to the selected member.
Calculation Modules
504
At the bottom is a sketch showing the member and applied loads for reference.
When you click on any item in the two load entry lists, that location in the list will change into a data entry item. The columns in the list have their own specific entry types that will be described below. Point Loads Entry List
Active This is a Yes/No checkbox that allows you to turn the load on and off. This is useful when you want to quickly see the effect of removing the load without actually having to delete the load and then potentially have to redefine the load at a later time.
Direction
505
This specifies the direction of application of the load. Here is a description of each direction: Global X: This point load acts in a direction parallel to the Global X Axis. Entering a positive value will apply the load to the right (in the positive X direction). Global Y: This point load acts in a direction parallel to the Global Y Axis. The algebraic sign on the magnitude will affect the direction of application based on the Applied Global Y Load Sign Convention setting on the General tab as follows: When the Applied Global Y Load Sign Convention is set to "Global +Y Loads act towards +Y (Upward)", then loads applied in the Global Y direction with a positive algebraic sign act upward, and loads applied in the Global Y direction with a negative algebraic sign act downward. When the Applied Global Y Load Sign Convention is set to "Global +Y Loads act towards -Y (Downward)", then loads applied in the Global Y direction with a positive algebraic sign act downward, and loads applied in the Global Y direction with a negative algebraic sign act upward. In order to most efficiently describe the direction of application of the "Local" load types, it helps to refer to the member local axis system. Each member can be thought of as having its own x, y, and z coordinate axes that are mutually perpendicular and follow the right-hand rule. The orientation of the member local axes can be determined as follows: 1. The local x axis is always parallel to a vector from the "I" node to the "J" node. (This axis is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the member.) 2. The local z axis is always parallel to the Global Z axis. 3. The local y axis can be found by taking the vector cross product of local z cross local x. (Envision using the right hand to rotate the local z axis into the local x axis, and the right thumb will automatically indicate the positive direction of the local y axis.) Local x: This point load acts parallel to the member's local x axis. If this load is specified with a positive magnitude, the load will act in the positive direction of the local x axis. If this load is specified with a negative magnitude, the load will act in the negative direction of the local x axis. Local y: This point load acts parallel to the member's local y axis. If this load is specified with a positive magnitude, the load will act in the positive direction of the local y axis. If this load is specified with a negative magnitude, the load will act in the negative direction of the local y axis. It should now be obvious that it is VERY important to have a thorough understanding of member orientation when using "Local" load types. Moment: This specifies that the load is a concentrated moment. Positive moments follow the right-hand rule and apply a counter-clockwise rotational force to the
Calculation Modules
506
member (when viewing the model from the positive Z direction). Temperature: This is used to specify temperatures at particular locations along the length of a member. The module then uses these spot temperatures, in conjunction with the joint temperatures specified in the Joint Data list, to establish temperature gradients along the member(s). The module will calculate the effects of the specified temperature gradient from the end joint to the location along the member at which the temperature was specified. If you apply more temperature loads, the gradients are developed between each adjacent point of temperature load.
Location This specifies the distance from the "I" joint where the point load is located. Load Type & Magnitude You can enter seven different types of loads on the frame and combine them using the factors on the Load Combinations tab. Distributed Load Entry List
Active This is a Yes/No checkbox that allows you to turn the load on and off. This is useful when you want to quickly see the effect of removing the load. Direction
507
This specifies the direction of application of the load.
Here is a description of the different directions: Global X: This load acts in a direction parallel to the Global X Axis and is distributed along the full length of the member. If the member is sloped, the load will be applied for the full length of the member. So if a member has a 10-foot rise and a 10-foot run, the length of the load will equal 14.14 feet. Entering a positive value will apply the load to the right (in the positive X direction). Global Y: This load acts in a direction parallel to the Global Y Axis and is distributed along the full length of the member. If the member is sloped, the load will be applied for the full length of the member. So if a member has a 10-foot rise and a 10-foot run, the length of the load will equal 14.14 feet. The algebraic sign on the magnitude will affect the direction of application based on the Applied Global Y Load Sign Convention setting on the General tab as follows: When the Applied Global Y Load Sign Convention is set to "Global +Y Loads act towards +Y (Upward)", then loads applied in the Global Y direction with a positive algebraic sign act upward, and loads applied in the Global Y direction with a negative algebraic sign act downward. When the Applied Global Y Load Sign Convention is set to "Global +Y Loads act towards -Y (Downward)", then loads applied in the Global Y direction with a positive algebraic sign act downward, and loads applied in the Global Y direction with a negative algebraic sign act upward. Projected X: This load acts in a direction parallel to the Global X Axis, but it is applied only to the length of the member projected onto the Global Y Axis. So if a member has a 10-foot rise and a 10-foot run, the length of the load will equal 10.00 feet (the rise of the member). Projected Y: This load acts in a direction parallel to the Global Y Axis, but it is applied only to the length of the member projected onto the Global X axis. So if a member has a 10-foot rise and a 10-foot run, the length of the load will equal 10.00 feet (the run of the member).
Calculation Modules
508
In order to most efficiently describe the direction of application of the "Local" load types, it helps to refer to the member local axis system. Each member can be thought of as having its own x, y, and z coordinate axes that are mutually perpendicular and follow the right-hand rule. The orientation of the member local axes can be determined as follows: 1. The local x axis is always parallel to a vector from the "I" node to the "J" node. (This axis is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the member.) 2. The local z axis is always parallel to the Global Z axis. 3. The local y axis can be found by taking the vector cross product of local z cross local x. (Envision using the right hand to rotate the local z axis into the local x axis, and the right thumb will automatically indicate the positive direction of the local y axis.) Local x: This distributed load acts parallel to the member's local x axis. If this load is specified with a positive magnitude, the load will act in the positive direction of the local x axis. If this load is specified with a negative magnitude, the load will act in the negative direction of the local x axis. Local y: This distributed load acts parallel to the member's local y axis. If this load is specified with a positive magnitude, the load will act in the positive direction of the local y axis. If this load is specified with a negative magnitude, the load will act in the negative direction of the local y axis. It should now be obvious that it is VERY important to have a thorough understanding of member orientation when using "Local" load types. Temperature: This is used to specify temperatures at particular locations along the length of a member. The module then uses these spot temperatures, in conjunction with the joint temperatures specified in the Joint Data list, to establish temperature gradients along the member(s). The module will calculate the effects of the specified temperature gradient from the end joint to the location along the member at which the temperature was specified. If you apply more temperature loads, the gradients are developed between each adjacent point of temperature load. Location - Start, End This specifies the distance from the "I" joint to the beginning and end of the load. Leaving BOTH values as zero (0.0) will cause the load to be applied to the full length of the member. Load Type & Magnitude You can enter seven different types of loads on the frame and combine them using the values on the Load Combinations tab.
509
10.7.3.3 Member Forces
This tab allows you to review the final calculated forces for a member. To review member forces, first click the member of interest in the Select Member list. Next, click on a load combination in the Select Load Comb. list. The member end forces will be displayed for the chosen load combination, and a table of member forces at increments along the length of the member will be shown. This tab provides a more simplified view of member forces than the large tables displayed on the Results tab.
Calculation Modules
510
10.7.4 Sections & Materials

Need more? Ask Us a Question The two tabs under Sections & Materials provide the ability to define the section properties and material properties for the members used in the frame.
10.7.4.1 Section Data
The SECTION DATA tab allows you to specify sections to be used for the frame. Section Label vs. Group Label These two ways of labeling a section are very helpful and should be understood. The Section Label is the actual name of the section, whether it is an AISC section name like W14x22 or a wood section like 4x10. The Section Label always represents something that can be retrieved from the internal databases. It can also be the name of a section that you create by entering a name and some properties. The Group Label lets you associate a section name with a label that is meaningful to you and that can be used on multiple members. This makes it so you can easily revise the
511
section that is assigned to a set of members without the need to change the section name individually for all the members where it is used. For example, say that members 1,3,5,7,9,11,13,15 and 17 will all use the same section. You don't know which AISC section will be selected, but you DO know it will be the same section. You can assign a preliminary section name of HSS 3x3x1/4 and a group label of "diagonal_1". If the frame analysis shows that the HSS section fails, you can simply change it to a different section (with new properties). Because that section is linked to those members with the group label, it simplifies the section assignment and modification for the entire group. Adding and Deleting Sections When you click the [Add Section] button, the following window appears:
To select a section from the built-in AISC or NDS databases, just click the appropriate tab and either type in the section name or click the [Lookup] button. If you want to add your own section name and type in the properties, click the Undefined tab, type in the desired section name, and click [OK].
[Delete Section] will delete the section you've highlighted in the list. Any members using that section will be changed to reference the Default section.
Calculation Modules
512
Editing the List Columns Section label When you click on the entries in this column the entry position will change to a button labeled [Lookup]. This button provides access to the built-in section databases. Group Label When you click on the entries in this column the entry position changes to a text editing box. Material When you click on the entries in this column the entry position changes to a [Lookup] button. This button provides access to a list of the material properties that you have already defined on the Materials tab.
Section property values These entry columns change to numeric entries when selected to allow entry of the values.
10.7.4.2 Material Data
This screen provides the ability to define the material values used by the sections you define. Clicking [Add Material] displays the following input box for you to enter the material name:
513
To add a new material, enter the name of the material and then click [OK]. The new material will appear in the Materials list on the Material Data tab as shown below:
Clicking on the Elastic Modulus, Density, Yield Stress and Thermal Coefficient entry items will change them into numeric entry boxes where you can type in a value and press [Tab] or click off of the value to complete the data entry. Elastic Modulus The elastic modulus defines how the members will react to forces by defining the relationship between stress and strain. Density The density entry is used only when the module calculates and applies member self weights using the Member Self Weight entry column on the Load Combination tab. Yield Stress The use of this column and additional allowable stress information will be enhanced as the module matures. For steel members this property is used to perform the AISC member allowable stress evaluation. When wood stress evaluation is added, the module will store other pertinent values from the built-in database. Thermal Coefficient This defines the rate of thermal expansion per degree of temperature change. This value is only used when temperature loads are defined for a member.
Calculation Modules
514
10.7.5 Load Combinations

This data table controls how all of the loads are applied to the frame and also enables you to have member self weight loads automatically considered in specified directions. The current list of load combinations comes from ASCE 7-05. It represents most of the commonly used load combinations suggested for both Allowable Stress Design and Strength Design. This table will be enhanced to provide more controlled specification of load combinations including templates for serviceability checks. Auto-Minimize Combinations to Run This checkbox instructs the module to eliminate load combinations that have a duplicate set of factored loads or specific combinations that include wind, seismic, earth, and snow load types when none of those load types is present in the model. The purpose is simply to suppress duplicate result sets. Add This button adds a load combination line to the list. You can then edit the factors. Delete This button deletes the currently selected load combination from the list.
(Load a new load combination set) This button allow you to retrieve load combination sets from the built-in load combination database and place them in the list. Clicking it will display a popup menu listing the load combination sets currently included in the database.
Description of Items in List Load Combination Name This is the name of the load combination. It consists of abbreviations for each included load type along with the associated numeric values that represent the respective load factors. You cannot edit this name. It is constructed automatically
515
based on the entries you make in the following columns. Note in the following image how the Load Combination Name is constructed from the specified values:
Run LC Clicking on this entry changes it to a checkbox, which controls whether that load combination is used or ignored.
This button allows you to change the Run setting for all the load combinations at once using several options.
Group Multiplier This value acts as a multiplier on the entire load combination. Lets say your values describe a combination of 1.0D + 0.7L + 0.3E and you want to reduce that entire combined loading by 50%. You would enter a value of 0.5 for the Group Multiplier. The resulting load combination would be 0.50 * (1.0D + 0.7L + 0.3E). Individual Load Factors Enter the numeric value to be applied to each type of load. Member Self Weight When either of these two values is non-zero, the module will calculate the weight of each member (as cross sectional area * density * length) and consider that weight during the analysis. A "-1" value for "Global Y" will apply the member self weight downward (in the -Y direction). A value of "1" for "Global X" will have the member self weight applied to the right (the +X direction).
Calculation Modules
516
517
10.7.6 Results
Need more? Ask Us a Question The RESULTS tab provides extensive lists of detailed and summarized results from the frame analysis.
10.7.6.1 Extreme Values
Joint Displacements & Reactions This list summarizes the extreme joint displacements and support reactions. For each joint there is a four-line result display. The first line shows the joint label and the maximum values for each displacement and reaction direction. The second line indicates the load combinations that create the maximum values. The third line indicates the minimum (most negative) values for each displacement and reaction direction. The fourth line indicates the load combinations that create the minimum values.
Calculation Modules
518
Member Forces This table summarizes the extreme forces that occur anywhere along the length of each member. (The detailed forces ALONG the length of the member are given in another list within this Results section.) For each member there is a four-line result display. The first line shows the member label and the maximum member force values that occur anywhere along the length of the member. The second line indicates the load combinations that create the maximum values. The third line indicates the minimum (most negative) member force values that occur anywhere along the length of the member. The fourth line indicates the load combinations that create the minimum values.
519
Stress Checks The Stress Checks tab is only displayed when the Member Stress Check Status item on the General tab has been set to ASD or LRFD stress checks. For each member this list shows the following information: member label section or group label material governing load combination that results in the maximum Axial plus Bending stress ratio maximum stress ratio for the Axial plus Bending check pass/fail status for the Axial plus Bending check location along the member length where the critical Axial plus Bending result was found to occur governing load combination that results in the maximum Shear stress ratio maximum stress ratio for the Shear check pass/fail status for the Shear check location along the member length where the critical Shear result was found to occur. The image below shows the results for the steel members used in this frame:
Calculation Modules
520
10.7.6.2 Joint Displacements & Reactions
This list summarizes the joint displacements resulting from each load combination. Joint displacements are reported with respect to the global coordinate system. Clicking on the [+] icon to the left of each combination will expand the sub-list to show the detailed values.
521
10.7.6.3 Member End Forces
This list summarizes the member end forces resulting from each load combination. Clicking on the [+] icon to the left of each combination will expand the sub-list to show the detailed values.
Calculation Modules
522
10.7.6.4 Member Details
This list gives a very detailed presentation of the member forces and member deflections at small increments along the member length. Note that the Member Deflections provided in this list are reported relative to the straight-line chord drawn between the deflected position of the two end nodes of the member. In other words, these Member Deflections will ALWAYS report a value of zero at both ends of all members. The list is a tree with two sub-levels: The main level allows a choice of the load combination. The next level down offers the choice of which member to observe. Click on the [+] icons to expand the list to show more details. Click on the [-] icon will compress the level.
523
10.7.6.5 Member Check Results
The Member Check Results tab is only shown when the Member Stress Check Status item on the General tab has been set to ASD or LRFD stress checks. Stress Check Results For each member this list shows the following information: member label section or group label material governing load combination that results in the maximum stress ratios maximum stress ratio for the Axial plus Bending check pass/fail status for the Axial plus Bending check location along the member length where the critical Axial plus Bending result was found to occur maximum stress ratio for the Shear check pass/fail status for the Shear check location along the member length where the critical Shear result was found to occur. The image below shows the results for the steel members used in this frame:
Calculation Modules
524
Steel Details This list pertains only to the stress checks for steel members, and it provides detailed information about the stress checks at small increments along the length of each member.
525
10.7.6.6 Sign Convention
Coordinate Axis Convention The right-hand rule states that if you take the vector cross product of X cross Y, the result is in the Z direction. This is what is used to establish the positive Z direction if you know the positive X and Y directions. It applies to the Global Coordinate Axis system and the member local coordinate axis system in the 2-D Frame Analysis module, in the 2-D Frame Analysis module. The Global Coordinate Axis system is oriented such that X points to the right, Y points upward, and Z is perpendicular to the screen in the 2-D Frame Analysis module. The member local coordinate axis system is established as follows. A vector from the I node to the J node establishes the member local x axis. The vector cross product of local x cross Global Y produces the member local z direction. This works for all member orientations except for vertically oriented members, because it is not possible to take the vector cross product of two parallel vectors. So in those cases the module adopts the convention that the member local z axis will be parallel to the Global Z axis. These are just mathematical rules that establish that member local z will be perpendicular to the screen (unless you have specified that the member is working in weak axis bending). The local z axis is perpendicular to the web of a wide flange section. It typically represents the strong axis of a member. Finally, we need to establish the orientation of the local y axis. Vector cross product rules for a right-hand coordinate system also state that local z cross local x produces local y. So this pins down the orientation of the local y axis. The local y axis of a wide flange member lies in the plane of the web and is mutually perpendicular to the local x and local z axes. For a horizontally oriented beam member, the local y axis points straight
Calculation Modules
526
up, parallel to the Global Y axis.
Result Sign Convention Now for the sign conventions of the various results that are available.
Joint Displacements Joint Displacements are reported with respect to the Global Coordinate Axis system. A positive displacement indicates a displacement in the direction of the positive corresponding axis. A positive rotation indicates a positive rotation about the Global Z axis. (Using the thumb of the right hand, point the thumb in the direction of the positive Global Z axis, and the natural curl of the right fingers will indicate the direction of a positive rotation.)
Reactions Reactions are also reported with respect to the Global Coordinate Axis system. A positive force reaction indicates a force in the direction of the positive corresponding axis. A positive moment reaction indicates a positive moment about the Global Z axis. (Using the thumb of the right hand, point the thumb in the direction of the positive Global Z axis, and the natural curl of the right fingers will indicate the direction of a positive moment.)
Member End Forces Member End Forces are reported with respect to the member local coordinate axis system. A positive value of axial load at the I end of the member means that the force acts in the member local x direction, so it is pushing into the starting end of the member, so it represents a compressive force. Likewise, a negative value of axial load at the J end of the member means that the force acts in the member local -x direction, so it is pushing into the ending end of the member, so again this represents a compressive force. Shears are also reported with respect to the member local coordinate axis system. A positive value of shear at the I end of the member means that the force acts in the member local y direction. Likewise, a negative value of shear at the J end of the member means that the force acts in the member local -y direction. A positive value of moment at either end of the member means that the moment acts in the member local z direction. (Using the thumb of the right hand, point the thumb in the direction of the positive Global Z axis, and the natural curl of the right fingers will indicate the direction of a positive moment.)
Member Forces at Sections The physical sense of the member forces at sections can best be established by relating to the physical sense of the member end forces at the starting end of the member as described above.
527
Deflections (Relative to member ends) The deflections relative to member ends are measured parallel to the member local y axis and are referenced from the straight-line chord connecting the undeflected end node locations. Positive values represent deflections in the positive local y axis direction from that straight-line chord.
Calculation Modules
528
10.7.7 Frame Sketch

This tab provides a graphical display of the frame. You can use various check boxes, displacement magnification and load combination selection items to control the display. You can quickly display a sketch of the frame when in another tab by hovering the cursor over the double rectangle icon in the upper right corner of the window. See small image below:
529
10.7.8 Member Diagrams

This tab allows you to display axial load, moment, shear and deflection diagrams for each individual member in the frame. You have two selection areas to use... Select Load Combination This box lists all of the load combinations that are being run. Click on any of the available load combinations in the list to view diagrams based on that load combination. Select Member to Chart This box lists all of the members in the frame. Click on any of the members in the list to view diagrams for that member.
Tabs All, A, V, M, D These tabs let you explore the force details for the selected member and load combination in different ways. When the All tab is selected, the extreme values of axial load, moment, shear, and deflection are presented for the currently selected member. The other tabs provide detailed list of the values for the currently selected which are
Calculation Modules
530
used to create the respective diagrams.
531
10.7.9 Reports
This tab lets you select what data to print from the frame analysis.
Under Output Data you have the choice of compressing the output to an Envelope Only status. If Envelope Only is not checked the full details will be printed which can results in many pages of output. It is advisable to look at a print preview to see what it generates. Using Envelope Only will examine each table and print only the extreme values for each load combination.
Calculation Modules
532
10.7.10 Printout
Here is a sample printout for the current frame:
533
Calculation Modules
534
535
Calculation Modules
536
537
Calculation Modules
538
10.8
Miscellaneous Calculation Modules
539
10.8.1 General Beam Analysis

The General Beam Analysis module offers beam analysis functionality but does not incorporate any design processes. In this way, it can be a useful tool for situations where only analysis results are desired, such as shear, moment, reactions, and deflections. General Data tab: The General Data tab allows you to set the span conditions, span lengths, and support conditions in much the same way that this information is provided in the other beam modules. Refer to the topic for additional explanation. In addition to these pieces of data, the General Data tab also provides input fields for the elastic modulus for bending, and the cross sectional area and moment of inertia of each span of the beam, as shown below:
Beams
Span Loads tab: The Span Loads tab allows you to specify loads on one span at a time. The behavior of the tools on this tab is identical to the tools described for use in the other beam modules. Refer to the
Beams
Loads All Spans tab: The Loads All Spans tab allows you to specify loads on all spans at the same time. The behavior of the tools on this tab is identical to the tools described for use in the other beam modules. Refer to the
Beams
Load Combinations tab: The Load Combinations tab provides a view of the load combinations that will be analyzed. It also offers the ability to: Select a different set of load combinations, Modify the values used as load factors, and
Calculation Modules
540
Turn certain combinations on and off. Refer to the

Beams
The General Beam Analysis module offers output options that are analogous to the output options provided by the other beam modules, with the exception that no design results are provided. The lower half of the screen is dedicated to the display of results. The vertical strip of tabs on the left side of the display allow you to choose between Calculations, Sketch, and Diagram as explained below: Calculations: The Calculations tab offers four sub-tabs: Summary Results: Displays extreme moments, maximum shear, extreme deflections and extreme reactions.
Maximum Combinations: Displays extreme moments and shears, on a span-by-span basis, for all load combinations.
M-V-D: Summary: Displays moment, shear, and deflections at small increments along all spans. Moment and shear are displayed for all load combinations. Deflection is displayed for service load combinations only.
541
Support Reactions: Displays support reactions for all supports, for all load combinations.
Sketch: Displays a sketch of the beam, indicating span lengths, support conditions, and applied loads.
Calculation Modules
542
Diagram: Displays a graphic depiction of the beam with superimposed graphs of Moment, Shear, or Deflection for a selected load combination, or for an envelope of all load combinations.
543
10.8.2 Torsional Analysis of Rigid Diphragm

This module provides horizontal force distribution analysis for a rigid diaphragm laterally supported by up to 160 resisting elements (walls, columns or generic resisting elements). An applied shear (and an optional orthogonal force) is applied to a center of mass location, and that force is distributed to all elements after the rotational stiffness analysis has been completed. All lateral forces are distributed to each element on the basis of relative rigidities and resisting element locations. Lateral shear forces, induced torsional forces, and minimum eccentricity are considered after determining the location of the center of rigidity. The module provides analysis for one level only. For structures where elements are symmetrically placed on many levels, a calculation may be performed for each level and results added to determine shears and overturning moments for each element. When determining center of mass (where the lateral force is applied) on successively lower levels when elements are NOT all aligned vertically, a new center of mass position should be calculated based upon element forces acting from the diaphragm from the level above and combined with the force at that level. A very unique capability of this module is to have the applied lateral load applied at angular increments for a full 360 degree rotation. The prior version of this module in our Version 5.8 software only applied the lateral load at 90 degree increments. Because seismic or wind loads can occur at any angle, we provide the ability for the user to define the angles at which the lateral load is applied to the rigid diaphragm for distribution to the resisting elements. Another feature is a more advanced application of minimum force eccentricity. The code specifies that a minimum eccentricity must be used to increase the torsional effect created by the moment arm between the point of load application and the center of rigidity. The minimum eccentricity is specified as 5% of the building dimension measured perpendicular to the direction of load application. This module creates an ellipse (measuring 5% of the building dimension on each axis) along which the lateral load is applied. So to recap.....the applied lateral load is applied at the angular increments you specify for a full 360 degrees, and this is performed for the number of angular locations you specify around the minimum eccentricity ellipse. This means if you use 15 degree angular increments for load direction and 15 degree increments for accidental eccentricity, then the lateral load is actually applied in (360/15+1) * (360/15+1) = 625 locations. This can provide a very accurate calculation of applied torsions and direct shears to all resisting elements connected to a rigid diaphragm.
Calculation Modules
544
Basic Usage The most important step for successful use of this module is to properly enter the X and Y location of the center of rigidity of each resisting element and its angle in degrees counterclockwise from a normal Cartesian "0" degree orientation. For each resisting element, its center of rigidity will be at the centroid of the wall or column section. The angle is measured with respect to the centerline of the length measurement (long dimension). 0 degrees and 180 degrees defines a wall's angle as parallel to the X-axis. 90 degrees and 270 degrees defines a wall as being parallel to the Y-axis. The angle increases positively in a counterclockwise direction. Lateral shears are typically the force at the diaphragm level due to wind or seismic forces at that level. Distance to Center of Mass specifies the X-Y location where the lateral shears act. If lateral forces must be added to the diaphragm from the level above or below, you must combine all forces to calculate an adjusted mass application point. Maximum Dimensions are used to calculate the minimum additional eccentricity that will be added to and subtracted from the inherent eccentricity to calculate governing forces for each resisting element. When defining walls as resisting elements, the thickness, length, and height are required for each wall providing lateral support to the diaphragm. These values are
545
used with the elastic modulus to establish the relative stiffness of each wall. For other resisting elements you can enter the section information or just enter the resisting element deflection under the same load for all elements. The Elastic Modulus does not have to be an exact value if all of the elements are of identical construction. In this situation, it may be simpler to just use a value of 1. X & Y Distances for each resisting element define the location of the center of stiffness of each element in plan view. This location will be used when combining all stiffnesses and calculating the overall center of rigidity for all elements acting as a system. When using walls or columns as resisting elements, an inclination angle can be entered for each element. For walls, this angle describes the orientation of the long axis of the wall, measured in degrees counterclockwise from a normal Cartesian "0" degree orientation. For columns, this angle describes the orientation of the X axis of the column, measured in degrees counterclockwise from a normal Cartesian "0" degree orientation. Enter all angles as positive. Enter the fixity condition that best describes the element's top and bottom restraint against rotation about the longitudinal and transverse axes. FP (Fix/Pin) would be appropriate for an inverted pendulum condition (where walls or columns cantilever up from a fixed base condition, but are free to rotate at their tops). FP would also be appropriate for a moment frame structure with pinned column bases (a structure that behaves like a table). The FF (Fix/Fix) would be appropriate for conditions where both the tops and the bottoms of the columns and/or walls are fixed against rotation about their longitudinal and transverse axes. This setting results in double curvature in the vertical lateral force resisting elements. Unique Features This module uses a numerical approach to determine center of rigidity location and to distribute lateral forces to each resisting element. Because resisting elements may be located at any angle, a rigorous stiffness analysis is performed, calculating each element's stiffness about both axes and combining the stiffnesses of all the elements to determine a center of rigidity location. Assumptions & Limitations Because this program performs a very complex stiffness matrix analysis for all resisting elements, the traditional method of listing separate components of direct and torsional shears is not applicable. Also, the module internally adds and subtracts the additional accidental eccentricity (based on both maximum dimensions) about each axis to calculate maximum force for each element. This results in one final force value being displayed for each wall. Coordinate System
Calculation Modules
546
Please note that a STRICT X-Y coordinate system should be used to ensure that the analysis is properly carried out. When setting up an X-Y coordinate axis, please follow the standard Cartesian model with the diaphragm located such that X increases to the right and Y increases up the screen. Unless another method is necessary, this will perform very well (but the module can handle variations). General Input Tab
Applied Lateral Force This is the main force applied to the rigid diaphragm. The location of application is specified in the input item labeled Location of Shear Application. Additional Orthogonal Force This is an optional force that is applied at a 90 degree angle to the main force. Some codes specify that this force must be applied along with the main force. Maximum Load Used for Analysis The final force applied to the diaphragm is sqrt(Main2 + Orthogonal2). Load Angular Increment This module allows the force to be applied in almost all angular directions to the rigid diaphragm. According to the entry for angular increment, the module will apply the load to the diaphragm at multiple angular increments. For example, if you select "15 deg", the module will apply the "Maximum Force Used for Analysis" at 0, 15, 30, .... 360 degree angles. When the Load Angular Increment is set to smaller values, it will result in slightly longer calculation times, but it wall also allow the module to "zero in" more accurately on the actual maximum shear forces in all of the resisting elements. Note that there is also an option named "Specify". This allows you to very precisely specify a singular direction for the application of load. Accidental Eccentricity Angular Increment Most building codes require the consideration of an "accidental eccentricity". This is
547
a prescribed additional amount of moment arm that must be compounded with the inherent eccentricity that already exists in the system; i.e. the distance between the center of rigidity and the center of mass for seismic loads or the distance between the center of rigidity and the center of exposure for wind loads. This additional eccentricity accounts for the variability of the exact location of applied load in normal as-built conditions. Normally an "X direction" and a "Y direction" accidental eccentricity would be determined as a function (typically 5%) of the overall building dimension in each direction. Then, the X directed force would be applied at two locations: center of mass PLUS "Y direction" eccentricity, and center of mass MINUS "Y direction" eccentricity. And the Y directed force would be applied at two locations: center of mass PLUS "X direction" eccentricity, and center of mass MINUS "X direction" eccentricity. However, in this module the "X direction" and "Y direction" eccentricities are used to specify the dimensions of an ellipse that encircles the center of mass. This ellipse creates a continuous path that smoothly incorporates the "X direction" and "Y direction" eccentricities. In this way, it defines all possible locations where the load should be applied to account for all possible accidental eccentricity locations. The entry for Accidental Eccentricity Angular Increment specifies the angular increment that will be used to subdivide the ellipse into a number of locations where the force will be applied to the diaphragm. Summary of Angular Increment & Accidental Eccentricity Angular Increment The module applies the "Maximum Load" at the "Load Angular Increments" at each location of "Accidental Eccentricity Angular Increment" to generate an extensive set of results from which the maximum force values for each resisting element may be inspected. For example, setting both "Load Angular Increment" and "Accidental Eccentricity Angular Increment" to 15 degrees tells the module to run (360/15 + 1) * (360/15 + 1) = 625 separate analyses of force distributions to the resisting elements. This is not the highest degree of detail that the program can provide, but it may offer a good balance of accuracy versus analysis time. Location of Shear Application This specifies the X and Y location of the center of mass. The Accidental Eccentricity ellipse will be circumscribed around this location. Accidental Torsion Values Accidental torsion is defined as a percentage of overall constructed diaphragm dimension in each of two orthogonal directions. Therefore enter the necessary eccentricity percentage and both maximum diaphragm dimensions here. Resisting Element Tab
Calculation Modules
548
Resisting Element Type This module allows you to use three types of resisting elements. In past versions of this module, only walls were allowed. But many users wanted to enter information for braced frames or cantilevered columns for open buildings. So we've expanded this module to allow more general types of lateral resisting elements. WALL : Click the [Use a Wall] button to define a wall as a resisting element. The wall must be rectangular in plan and must have a non-zero height. The selections for "Fix" and "Pin" will alter the equation used to calculate deflection in BOTH directions of the wall (unless the option is selected to "Force all MINOR AXIS Stiffnesses to ZERO"). Using the entered height, length, thickness, and modulus of elasticity for bending and shear, the module will calculate the bending and shear stiffness of the wall and report the deflection for a unit 1 kip applied load.
COLUMN : Click the [Use a Bending Member] button to define a column as a resisting element. This will be a linear member whose stiffness is specified simply by its X and Y axis moments of inertia. You must also provide a value for the modulus of elasticity of the column for bending. Finally, you must make a fixity selection, which dictates the equation used to calculate deflection in BOTH directions of the column (unless the option is selected to "Force all MINOR AXIS Stiffnesses to ZERO"). Using these settings, the module will calculate the bending stiffness of the column and report the deflection for a unit 1 kip applied load.
GENERIC ELEMENT : Click the [Use Generic Resisting Element] button to specify a generic resisting element whose lateral deflection is known for an applied 1 kip load. This selection is intended for complex resisting elements like braced or moment frames, where another analysis module has determined the unit deflection. Note that this method of defining a resisting element offers and option named "When Stiffness deflections are 0.00, assume completely flexible". This option can be used
549
if your intent is to specify that an element is completely flexible in a certain direction. In this situation, you would need to specify an infinite deflection in that direction. So as a convenience, the system has been configured such that when this option is selected, it will interpret a deflection value of 0.00 as meaning that the element is completely flexible in that direction (i.e. has no ability to resist an applied force in that direction).
Add & Delete Buttons Use the [Add] and [Delete] buttons to add a new resisting element or delete the one currently highlighted in the list. Element Data This area allows you to specify a label and location of the center of resistance for a resisting element. Resisting Element List This is the list that you create to define the resisting element locations that give lateral force resistance to the rigid diaphragm. This table serves to give a summary of the deflections, location and major axis angle for each element. When you click to highlight a line in the table, the information for that resisting element is brought into the variables on the input area. Summary Maximum Tab Please note that a STRICT X-Y coordinate system should be used to ensure that the analysis is properly carried out. When setting up an X-Y coordinate axis, please follow the standard Cartesian model with the diaphragm. Recall that the module calculates the forces to each resisting element by rotating the force about its point of application. That point of application is in increments around an accidental eccentricity ellipse. This Summary Maximums tab provides the maximum forces for each resisting element along the major and minor axis of the element. For the wall named "4" in the image below, the module has examined all of the calculated forces and found that the maximum shear force along the MAJOR axis was 142.060 kips, resulting from the "Maximum Load Used for Analysis" being applied in a direction of 315 degrees. The location at which that force was applied was along the perimeter of the accidental eccentricity ellipse and the X,Y coordinates of that location are (94.98, -57.51) feet from the global datum point. Similarly for the MINOR axis, the maximum shear force was found to occur when the load was applied at 120 degrees.
Calculation Modules
550
Force Summary Detail Tab This tab provides the main table that shows all of the force calculations for each resisting element. It is tree structured, so clicking the [+] sign to the left of each item name will expand the result set for that item. In the image below we see that the data for the wall labeled "4" is expanded. Below "Label : 4" we see many lines labeled "0 deg". These are the results for the load applied at an orientation of 0 degrees. On each "0 deg" line, observe that the "X Ecc" and "Y Ecc" values are changing. These values are the locations of the applied load as it moves its way around the accidental eccentricity ellipse. The note at the top of the table indicates that the analysis is based on 15-degree "Eccentricity Location" increments. This implies that there will be (360 degrees/15 degrees) = 24 lines of data based on the "0 deg" force orientation. Then, if we scrolled down through the table, we would see that the load application angle has also been set to change in 15-degree increments as well.
Sketch Tab
551
Analysis Procedure Please see the following description for the procedure used to calculate the system stiffness matrix and resolve the forces for each resisting element.
Calculation Modules
552
553
Calculation Modules
554
555
Calculation Modules
556
10.8.3 Pole Footing Embedded in Soil

This module determines actual soil pressures and required depths for pole footings primarily supporting lateral loads. Such footings are commonly called "flagpole footings". Since applied top moment generates lateral soil pressures that usually govern the design, these footings typically have a depth/width ratio of 2:1 and greater. Cases with and without lateral restraint at the ground surface are allowed. Evaluation of actual and allowable pressures is in accordance with 2006 IBC Section 1805.7.2.
General Data Tab
557
Pole Footing Shape Use this section to specify whether the pole is round or rectangular (assumed square). Footing Width/Diameter Enter the width or diameter of the pole footing. Width is measured perpendicular to force direction. If the pole is specified as rectangular, the module will multiply the value entered for footing width 1.41 to determine an equivalent width dimension for calculations. Restraint at Ground Surface Specify whether the footing is free at the ground surface or restrained and cannot translate. A restrained footing indicates that a concrete slab or other rigid element prevents translation of the pole footing at the ground surface, but does not prevent rotation. When specifying a restrained footing, you must assure yourself that the final force required to provide the restraint can actually be developed by the restraining construction. When ground surface restraint is present, the lateral pressure value at the bottom of the pole will govern the design. Operation Mode This setting provides an option to select from two different modes of operation as follows: Calculate Minimum Depth: In this mode, the module will iterate to determine the minimum embedment depth required to make the actual lateral soil pressure lower than the allowable soil pressure. Find Lateral Pressure for Given Depth: In this mode, the module will calculate the lateral earth pressures caused by the specified pole size, embedment depth and applied loads. When this option is selected, a Pole Footing Embedment Depth input field will appear as shown below:
Calculation Modules
558
Allowable Pressure Limit Two options are provided as indicated below:
Limit only by "Max. Passive": Solves for a design that allows the passive pressure at 1/3 embedment depth to approach the value specified in the Allowable Lateral Passive Pressure field below (limited to the value specified in the Maximum Lateral Pressure Limit field). Example: Assume the following parameters: embedment depth is 42 feet allowable lateral passive pressure is 200 psf/ft with an upper limit of 3000 psf. When the Limit only by "Max. Passive" option is selected, the solution will progress as follows: The program will calculate the 1/3 embedment depth as (42 feet / 3) = 14 feet. Then it will calculate an allowable lateral passive pressure of (200 psf/ft * 14 ft) = 2800 psf. Next, the program will compare this calculated allowable lateral passive pressure value to the specified upper limit on the allowable passive pressure and determine that 2800 psf < 3000 psf, therefore it will use 2800 psf as the Allowable Lateral Passive Pressure. Finally, the program will solve for a design that achieves a passive pressure at (42 feet / 3) = 14 feet that does not exceed 2800 psf. Use limit of 12 ft (per IBC): Solves for a design that achieves a passive pressure at 1/3 embedment depth that does not exceed the Allowable Lateral Passive Pressure, where the Allowable Lateral Passive Pressure is calculated based on 1/3 of the embedment depth but not to exceed 12 feet. Example: Assume the following parameters:
559
embedment depth is 42 feet allowable lateral passive pressure is 200 psf/ft with an upper limit of 3000 psf. When the Use limit of 12 ft (per IBC) option is selected, the solution will progress as follows: The program will calculate the 1/3 embedment depth as (42 feet / 3) = 14 feet. Next, it will compare the 1/3 embedment depth to 12 feet and determine that 14 feet > 12 feet, therefore it will base the allowable lateral passive pressure calculation on 12 feet. The allowable lateral passive pressure will be calculated as (200 psf/ft * 12 ft) = 2400 psf. Next, the program will compare this calculated allowable lateral passive pressure value to the specified upper limit on the allowable passive pressure and determine that 2400 psf < 3000 psf, therefore it will use 2400 psf as the Allowable Lateral Passive Pressure. Finally, the program will solve for a design that achieves a passive pressure at (42 feet / 3) = 14 feet that does not exceed 2400 psf. Allowable Lateral Passive Pressure The allowable lateral passive pressure that the soil can withstand. This value is entered as pounds per square foot per foot of embedment depth. Maximum Lateral Pressure Limit This value is used to specify an upper limit on the Allowable Lateral Passive Pressure, so that it does not increase in an uncontrolled manner as the embedment depth increases. This value is entered as pounds per square foot. Applied Loads Tab
This module allows many types of loads to be applied to a pole footing embedded in soil. Lateral Concentrated Loads Module allows one concentrated load with various load types to be applied at a specified distance above the surface of the soil.
Calculation Modules
560
Lateral Distributed Loads You can apply a uniform lateral load to the pole by specifying the magnitude of the load and the starting and ending locations. Applied Moments You can apply a concentrated moment. No "height" entry is required, because it is purely a rotational force. Vertical Load You can also apply a vertical load so that the module can calculate the vertical bearing load on the footing for each load combination.
Load Combinations Tab Use this tab to specify the load combinations you want the module to analyze.
Results Tab The results tab provides a summary of the calculations. The table reports the resulting forces, moments and required depth for each load combination. The Controlling Values area provides information for the most severe load combination.
561
Sketch Tab
Calculation Modules
562
10.8.4 General Section Property Calculator

Overview This module determines section properties for built-up sections with rectangles, hollow circles, solid circles, standard AISC steel sections and general multi-sided solid shapes. AISC sections can be recalled from the database files and can be included in the built-up section. All sections from the 13th Edition AISC Steel Construction Manual are available, and can be reoriented as necessary. The calculated section property values include: area, moments of inertia, center of gravity location, extreme fiber distances, section moduli, and radius of gyration.
Basic Usage Before starting data entry, be sure you have set up an X-Y coordinate system to consistently reference all component locations. For each rectangular shape, enter the height, width, and center of area measured from
563
the datum. Hollow circular sections are entered by specifying the outside radius and thickness. Solid circular sections are entered by specifying the outside radius and setting the thickness to zero. For AISC sections, you can use the Xcg and Ycg input fields to locate the section's centroid position with respect to the datum. The module knows the centroid location of AISC members with respect to their own extreme fiber locations. However, you need to enter the location of the member's centroid in relation to the other members in the builtup section. Be careful, as this can be tricky when entering channels, angles, and tee sections that are rotated. A unique feature allows the user to specify that AISC sections can be rotated in 90degree increments, and steel angle sections can also be mirrored about their Y axis.
Assumptions & Limitations The module operates on a simple calculation procedure: Calculate the moment of inertia of each shape, Calculate the neutral axis of the group of shapes, and Calculate the moment of inertia of the group using I + A*D2 equations. More complex analysis such as polar moment of inertia, plastic moduli, and buckling constants are beyond the scope of the module at this time but continuing development will add these items in future updates. Rolled Section / Table tab
This tab enables you to specify up to 10 sections from the AISC 13th Edition database to use in a built-up member. The square buttons across the top of the tab are used to represent the component sections that comprise your built-up shape. When a section has been specified for a particular button, a small green upward facing triangle will be shown under the
Calculation Modules
564
corresponding button. Click on any button to add a section or view and modify the section that has already been assigned to that button. Note: It is important to understand that the numbered buttons on the various tabs DO NOT represent different built-up shapes. Instead, each instance of this module only creates ONE built-up shape, and the overall built-up shape consists of a composite of ALL sections that currently exist on ANY buttons in the Rolled Section / Table tab, the Rectangular & Circular tab, and the General Shapes tab. To insert an AISC section you can: Type in the section name and press [Tab]. The module will search the database and retrieve the information. Use the [Browse Steel Sections] button to display the steel database where you can navigate and select the desired section. Rotation Angle: Counter-Clockwise If you need to rotate a section, click one of the four angular rotation buttons. Rotate Section 180 degrees about its own y-y Axis This checkbox option will only be displayed for single-angle sections. It offers the ability to mirror a single-angle section if needed. Xcg & Ycg Enter the location of the section's centroidal axis measured from the datum (the origin of your assumed X-Y Cartesian coordinate system). Section Properties These values will be filled in after you make your choice from the AISC database. HOWEVER you can alter these values yourself. Of particular importance for unsymmetrical sections is entering the correct "Xbar" and "Ybar" location. This is the distance from the lower-left edge of the section, measured upwards and to the right, to the centroidal axis position of the section. Steel Section Database Click the [Browse Steel Sections] button to display the AISC database window:
565
Rectangular & Circular tab
This tab allows you to specify simple rectangular and circular shapes. The square buttons across the top of the tab are used to represent the component sections that comprise your built-up shape. When a section has been specified for a particular button, a small green upward facing triangle will be shown under the corresponding button. Click on any button to add a section or view and modify the section that has already been assigned to that button. Not Used / Rectangular / Circular Select the shape you wish to use for this item.
Calculation Modules
566
Rectangular Data Entry When a rectangular shape is chosen the data entry consists of height and width. Circular Data Entry When a circular shape is selected the data entry consists of Outside Radius and Wall Thickness (not inside radius). To model a solid circular section, enter the appropriate Outside Radius and set the Wall Thickness to zero.
Xcg & Ycg Enter the location of the section's centroidal axis measured from the datum (the origin of your assumed X-Y Cartesian coordinate system).
General Shapes tab
This tab allows you to select from a number of common polygonal shapes. With each selection the reference drawing and data entry prompts will change.
567
The square buttons across the top of the tab are used to represent the component sections that comprise your built-up shape. When a section has been specified for a particular button, a small green upward facing triangle will be shown under the corresponding button. Click on any button to add a section or view and modify the section that has already been assigned to that button. Xcg & Ycg Enter the location of the section's centroidal axis measured from the datum (the origin of your assumed X-Y Cartesian coordinate system). Rotation Angle: Counter-Clockwise For these shapes you can rotate the section in one-degree increments. Positive angles represent counter-clockwise rotation. Results Tab
Detailed Properties Table This table summarizes each of the component items you have added to the section. It reports their individual locations, properties and maximum distance from CG for each of the four edges. Note: This table scrolls to the right. Just use the scroll bar along the bottom of the table. Total Area The total area of all defined shapes, including the area of any AISC sections which have been included in the built-up shape. Inertia: Ixx & Iyy The overall moment of inertia of the composite section is determined by applying the following equation to all the defined shapes: Ixx = Iox + (A * dy 2) and Iyy = Ioy + (A * dx 2) where d = Distance from the shape's C.G. to the overall C.G. of the composite section, measured in the direction indicated by the subscript.
Calculation Modules
568
Section Modulus: Sxx and Syy These values are the calculated section moduli of the composite section. The values are determined by dividing Ixx or Iyy by the extreme fiber distances above, below, right, and left of the center of gravity of the section. Radius of Gyration The radius of gyration of the composite section is determined using the typical equation: rxx = (Ixx /A) and ryy = (Iyy /A) . Max Distance from CG For each of the sections in the built-up shape, these columns report the distance from the extreme fibers of that section to the C.G. of the composite section.
Sketch
569
10.8.5 Rebar Development Table

Need more? Ask Us a Question This module calculates development and splice lengths for deformed steel rebar in concrete. Since typical development lengths are readily available in tables, this module is primarily for developing tables of development lengths when unusual conditions affect the lengths. The module uses ACI 318-05 sections 12.1, 12.2, 12.3 and 12.5 for straight tension & compression development and hooked tension development. Two major categories of development calculation are available; straight development and hooked development. The module calculates the basic tension development length for straight and hooked cases, and compression development for straight cases only.
Item Descriptions Print This Information Check this box if you want the development calculation on the current tab to appear on the printout. This Bar
Calculation Modules
570
Enter a description for the current development calc. Bar Details Enter the basic stress info for this bar. You can also select to perform the calculation according to ACI 318-91. Straight Development This section performs tension & compression bar development according to ACI section 12.2 and 12.3. Please refer to the ACI code for the proper definitions of these entries. Hooked Development This section performs tension hooked rebar development according to ACI section 12.5. Please refer to the ACI code for the proper definitions of these entries.
571
10.8.6 Steel Bolt Group Analysis

This module provides force distribution from loads applied to a group of up to 16 bolts. The required input data includes vertical and horizontal load magnitudes and their location with respect to a datum point, along with the coordinates of up to sixteen bolts. Using these force and bolt coordinates, the module calculates direct shears and torsional shears on each bolt due to its relative location within the group. Note: At least two bolts should be specified. All bolts are assumed to be of the same deformation characteristics when loads are distributed. Vertical and Horizontal forces are divided by the number of fasteners to give direct shears.
General Tab Specify the locations up to 16 bolts. Use the Total Number of Bolts entry to indicate bolt quantity. The correct number of data entry locations will be displayed.
Calculation Modules
572
Loads Tab Enter the magnitude of the applied loads, the location of the point of load application relative to the Datum point, and the angle of load application measured CCW from Cartesian zero degrees. Load Combinations Tab Based upon the selection of ASD or LRFD factoring, the appropriate load combinations will be displayed on the load combinations tab.
Results Tab On the left side of this tab are the calculated Center of Bolt Group location, calculated moment applied to the group from the load combination that creates the extreme moment and the eccentricity of the load application from the Center of Bolt Group. In the table on the right are presented the calculated of force for each bolt due to direct and torsional shears for each axis (after the applied load is reduced to X & Y components).
573
Detailed Bolt Results This tab provides the detailed calculations for all load combinations and all bolts.
Sketch
Calculation Modules
574
10.8.7 Steel Base Plate

This module designs steel column base plates according to the 13th Edition AISC Steel Construction Manual and the AISC Steel Design Guide 1, Second Edition. This module performs the analysis differently than the similar module in the Version 5 series of the Structural Engineering Library. The prior module used a strain compatibility method which was highly accurate numerically, but was at odds with the building codes that engineers and building departments were most familiar with. There also was published an AISC Base Plate Design Guide 2nd edition which provided expanded coverage of the topic and slightly different methodology. However that guide went out of print quickly, was not republished and is not available to most design offices. For those reasons, its validity as a national design method has not taken hold and is not followed here. This module handles base plate design for the following conditions: where the resultant eccentricity is zero, where the resultant eccentricity is within the middle third for full bearing pressure, where the resultant eccentricity is outside the middle third resulting in a triangular pressure distribution on part of the base plate, and extreme eccentricity conditions where anchor bolts are required. This module does not handle conditions where NET UPLIFT is present. When the summation of factored axial loads in a load combination is negative, then uplift controls and the module will not calculate. Under these conditions, a red error message will be displayed at the bottom of the window to notify you of this condition.
575
General & Materials Tab
The right side of this tab will look slightly different for LRFD:
Calculation Modules
576
For Axial Load Cases Only.... This selection controls the upward pressure used to design the plate. A brief description of each choice is provided below the buttons for each selection. Full Bearing: Bearing is assumed uniform under plate. If plate area is larger than needed, the larger "m" and "n" cantilevered dimensions could result in a thicker plate than would be required if the pressure was calculated by the other option. Bearing Area = P / Fp: Base plate is considered flexible with bearing concentrated close to column. Maximum Fp is used to calculate ''design'' minimum plate size. Determining the bearing pressure by this method might result in thicker plates if bending stress is high between webs or within pipe or tube walls. AISC 360-05 Method Select between ASD or LRFD design methods. Steel Base Plate Fy Specify the yield strength of the base plate material. ASD: ASIF: Allowable Stress Increase Factor For ASD design this is an allowable stress increase factor that is applied to Fy. Its usage is controlled by the state of the "ASIF" checkbox on the Load Combinations tab. ASD: Omega Enter the capacity reduction factor, Omega, to be used in ASD per AISC 360-05. LRFD: Phi Enter the capacity reduction factor, Phi, to be used in LRFD per AISC 360-05.
577
Concrete Support f'c 28-day compressive strength of concrete used to support the base plate. ASD: Allowable Bearing Increase Factor For ASD design this is an allowable stress increase factor that is applied to f'c for calculation of concrete bearing strength. Its usage is controlled by the state of the "ABIF" checkbox on the Load Combinations tab. Use AISC 360-05 Section J.8 for "Fp" Calculation Checking this box will tell the module to use AISC 360-05 Section J.8 to calculate the allowable bearing pressure of the support. When unchecked the screen will change slightly as shown below to allow entry of the allowable bearing pressure.
ASD: Omega per AISC J.8 AISC 360-05 Section J.8 specifies Omega as 2.5. This entry allows the value to be modified. LRFD: Phi per AISC J.8 AISC 360-05 Section J.8 specifies Phi as 0.6. This entry allows the value to be modified.
Column & Plate Tab
Steel Section Name & Database Button Type the AISC section name in the entry and press [Tab]. The module will look up the section in the Steel database and, if found, will retrieve the values. The name must be typed just as it appears in the 13th Edition AISC Steel Construction Manual.
Calculation Modules
578
Or click the [Section Database] and select a section.
button to display the built-in steel database
[Edit Values] Button Clicking this button will allow you to enter the steel properties. Plate Information Enter the length, width and thickness of the base plate. Use the change the values...the results are instantly recalculated. buttons to quickly
Concrete Support Enter the support dimensions that will be used to calculate the allowable bearing pressure increase, A1 * sqrt(A2/A1).
Applied Loads Tab
Py - Axial Load This column of entries specifies the axial load applied to the base plate. Note that positive values represent downward loads. Vz - Shear This column of entries specifies the shear applied parallel to the plate and to be resisted by the anchor bolts. Mx - Moment This column of entries specifies the moment that the column applies to the plate.
Anchor Bolts Tab Items on this tab specify the strength and location of the anchor bolts that will resist shear and tension.
579
Description Description of the bolt for your reference. Not used by module. Tension Capacity Net tension capacity of bolt after all capacity factors are applied. Shear Capacity Net shear capacity of bolt after all capacity factors are applied. Edge Distance Distance from edge of plate to center of bolt closest to edge. Number of Bolts in a Row The "Row" referred to is a row of bolts at the plate edge that will take any tension force. Number of Bolt Rows Number of rows of bolts. Row Spacing Spacing of rows when more than one row is used.
Load Combinations Tab This tab displays the load combinations used for either the ASD or LRFD selections. The screen capture below shows the factors when ASD load combinations are used.
Calculation Modules
580
The screen capture below shows the factors when LRFD load combinations are used.
Results Tab - Overall The Results tab contains a list of load combinations on the left and a summary of all the calculated values for each load combination on the right. Click one of the load combinations in the list to view results specifically for that load combination. The very first item in the list will always say Overall Results. The module will examine the results for all of the load combinations and determine which gives the extreme condition of stress and presents it the Overall Results item. This is the governing case for the base plate.
581
Results Tab - Axial Load Only When a load combination results in only an axial load being applied, the summary of information below is displayed. See the AISC Design Guide #1 starting on page 4 for a description of the values present here.
Results Tab - Small Eccentricity When a load combination results in an axial load and very small moment being applied, the summary of information below is displayed. This condition is caused when the moment causes the resultant eccentricity of the axial load to be within the middle 1/3rd of the base plate. See the AISC Design Guide #1 starting on page 19 for a description of the values present here.
Calculation Modules
582
Results Tab - Large Eccentricity When a load combination results in an axial load and large moment being applied, the summary of information below is seen. This condition is caused when the moment causes the resultant eccentricity of the axial load to be outside the middle 1/3rd of the base plate. See the AISC Design Guide #1 starting on page 21 for a description of the values present here.
Sketch Tab
583
Calculation Modules
584
10.9
External Items
The Structural Engineering Library allows you to add non-ENERCALC items into a Project File, such as: MS Excel Spreadsheets MS Word Documents Adobe Acrobat PDF Files Scanned Images The ability to include these types of items allows you to use the ENERCALC Project File as a central point of document preparation and storage for structural project calculations. These external items can be interspersed within the ENERCALC calculations. Here is an image of the Project Manager showing a Division that has been created specifically to contain the external items we are about to add:
585
10.9.1 EXCEL Spreadsheet

Adding a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet to the project requires that you already have Excel loaded on your computer. To add an Excel spreadsheet to your Project, click on the Division where you would like to insert the spreadsheet, click the [Add] button, and then click [MS Excel Spreadsheet]:
The screen will appear like this, ready for you to load the spreadsheet of your choice:
Calculation Modules
586
(1) Use the [Open/Retrieve] button to load the desired Excel spreadsheet. (2) Use the [Print Document] button to print this item using the Excel printing functionality. (3) Use the [Clear Document] button to remove the currently loaded Excel spreadsheet from the Project File. (4) Use the [SaveAs] button to save the currently loaded Excel spreadsheet to a new filename. (5) The Storage Method buttons are used to specify how the Excel spreadsheet will be stored for use within ENERCALC. [Embed] saves a copy of the item in the Project File. (Easiest for portability, results in larger Project File size, changes to original item will not be visible.) [Link] saves a link to the item in Project File. (Changes to original item will be visible, keeps Project File size small, not easily portable.) (6) This area is used to define the name of the Excel spreadsheet when it is stored externally from the Project File. (7) Enter a description of this item as needed. It will be displayed in the Descriptions column of the Project Manager for reference. (8) This is the area where the Excel spreadsheet is loaded, as shown below:
587
The last step is to click the [Save & Exit] button. The display will return to the Project Manager, and you will see an indication that the selected spreadsheet has been attached as shown in the image below:
Calculation Modules
588
589
10.9.2 WORD Document

Adding a Microsoft Word document to the Project requires that you already have Word loaded on your computer. To add a Word document to your Project, click on the Division where you would like to insert the document, click the [Add] button, and then click [MS Word Document]:
The screen will appear like this, ready for you to load the document of your choice:
Calculation Modules
590
(1) Use the [Open/Retrieve] button to load the desired Word document. (2) Use the [Print Document] button to print this item using the Word printing functionality. (3) Use the [Clear Document] button to delete the currently loaded Word document from the Project File. (4) Use the [SaveAs] button to save the currently loaded Word document to a new filename. (5) The Storage Method buttons are used to specify how the Word document will be stored for use within ENERCALC. [Embed] saves a copy of the item in the Project File. (Easiest for portability, results in larger Project File size, changes to original item will not be visible.) [Link] saves a link to the item in Project File. (Changes to original item will be visible, keeps Project File size small, not easily portable.) (6) This area is used to define the name of the Word document when it is stored externally from the Project File. (7) Enter a description of this item as needed. It will be displayed in the Descriptions column of the Project Manager for reference.
591
(8) This is the area where the Word document is loaded, as shown below:
The last step is to click the [Save & Exit] button. The display will return to the Project Manager, and you will see an indication that the selected document has been attached as shown in the image below:
Calculation Modules
592
593
10.9.3 Adobe Acrobat PDF

Note: When using Adobe Reader X, it is necessary to disable Protected Mode if PDFs are to be used as External Items in the Structural Engineering Library. To disable Protected Mode in Adobe Reader X, go to Edit > Preferences > General > Application Startup, and disable the option named Enable Protected Mode at startup. To add an Adobe Acrobat PDF file to your Project, click on the Division where you would like to insert the document, click the [Add] button, and then click [Acrobat PDF]:
The screen will appear like this, ready for you to load the PDF file of your choice:
Calculation Modules
594
(1) Use the [Open/Retrieve] button to load the desired PDF file. (2) Use the [Print Document] button to print this item using the PDF printing functionality. (3) Use the [Clear Document] button to delete the currently loaded PDF file from the Project File. (4) The Storage Method buttons are used to specify how the PDF file will be stored for use within ENERCALC. [Embed] saves a copy of the item in the Project File. (Easiest for portability, results in larger Project File size, changes to original item will not be visible.) [Link] saves a link to the item in Project File. (Changes to original item will be visible, keeps Project File size small, not easily portable.) (5) This area is used to define the name of the PDF file when it is stored externally from the Project File. (6) Enter a description of this item as needed. It will be displayed in the Descriptions column of the Project Manager for reference. (7) This is the area where the PDF file is loaded, as shown below:
595
The last step is to click the [Save & Exit] button. The display will return to the Project Manager, and you will see an indication that the selected PDF file has been attached as shown in the image below:
Calculation Modules
596
597
10.9.4 Scanned Document

The Structural Engineering Library now offers you the ability to use your scanner to create items and insert them into your Project File. To scan an item and add it to your Project File, click on the Division where you would like to insert the scanned item, click the [Add] button, and then click [Scan a Document]:
When the module is loaded you will see the screen below:
Calculation Modules
598
Here is a description of the various controls in this module: Scan Page: Using all the settings on the "Scanner Setup" page, perform a high resolution scan. Delete & Rescan: Delete the currently visible scan and rescan the image at a different resolution. Print this Scan: Print the currently visible image to a printer. Save scanned image: Save the current scan to a file. Scanner Setup: Access the scanner setup screen (see image below)
599
Options:
Reset Scanner: Send signals to the scanner to reset itself to its default state. Preview/Crop/Scan: Perform a fast, low resolution "preview" scan and display it for your use in defining the final region that will be used for the high resolution scan. Delete Page: Remove the current scan from this viewer. Image Manipulation buttons: Allow you to change the way you view the scans in this document.
Calculation Modules
600
To create a scanned item, place the item on the scanner and click the [Scan Page] button. If desired, enter text in the Description field. Then, click the [Save & Exit] button. The display will return to the Project Manager, and you will see an indication that the scanned item has been attached as shown in the image below:

Enercalc Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Enercalc Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Enercalc Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the document?

What is the purpose of the document?

What are the main sections covered in the document?

What are the main sections covered in the document?

Structural Engineering Library

Structural Engineering Library

A product of ENERCALC, INC.

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

Part II Installation & Activation

Part III Software Updates Part IV Support & Maintenance

1 Web Update ................................................................................................................................... 26

Part V Getting Started

Part VI Program Overview

1983-2011 ENERCALC, INC

Part VII Main Menu

2 Settings ................................................................................................................................... 79 3 Databases ................................................................................................................................... 80

Part VIII Project Manager

1 General Division ................................................................................................................................... 99

4 Project Printing ................................................................................................................................... 128

Part IX Sample Session

Part X Calculation Modules

1 Loads & Forces Division ................................................................................................................................... 190

2 Beams ................................................................................................................................... 239

3 Columns ................................................................................................................................... 313

4 General Walls ................................................................................................................................... 359

5 Shear Walls ................................................................................................................................... 418

6 Foundation ................................................................................................................................... 435

7 2-D ................................................................................................................................... 472 Frame Analysis

8 Miscellaneous Calculation Modules ................................................................................................................................... 538

9 External Items ................................................................................................................................... 584

1983-2011 ENERCALC, INC

1983-2011 ENERCALC, INC

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

1983-2011 ENERCALC, INC

1983-2011 ENERCALC, INC

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

1983-2011 ENERCALC, INC

Warning & Disclaimer

1983-2011 ENERCALC, INC

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

License & Copyright

1983-2011 ENERCALC, INC

End of Service Policy

1983-2011 ENERCALC, INC

Installation & Activation

Installation & Activation

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

1983-2011 ENERCALC, INC

Installation & Activation

for an application for an Academic

for an application for a

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

1983-2011 ENERCALC, INC

Installation & Activation

Click here for a video

Installation for use with a Flex License

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

Installation for use with a Network License

1983-2011 ENERCALC, INC